5§5ft* 






aSWiPBSJEfS 



r ffljg* gg£j| 



ii 


Sm-m Satnr Tf' 








LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 


'jjif*jFI[B&?Tyi \ iflfl g^~ nr^rt 


Pi 


iPl 
1*1131 

1111 

m 


P^^^H 




S^p + Sopp^t ©a. -— - 

Shelf _aM4_3 






UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 








reg&a^ffEw f ~ • ^^e^T* 


=£!!•: 1 1".- 


gg|gg 
iffll 


if 


llllli 

lillfil 


. - ^ ,., ■; 3 













#"1W 



sara 



SKmif 



FIRST LESSONS 



OLD TESTAMENT 



ADAPTED FOR USE 



IN THE DAY-SCHOOL, THE SABBATH-SCHOOL, AND THE 
FAMILY, 



ELI B. MILLER 

AND 

EVA A. MILLER. 



ILLUSTRATED. 




COLLEGE PRESS, BATTLE CREEK, MICH. 
1889. 






Copyright, 1889, 
By E. B. MILLER. 



PREFACE. 



The growing demand for instruction in Bible history, and the 
lack of suitable text-books on this subject have led to the preparation 
of the lessons contained in this little volume. 

These lessons are designed not only to present the facts of sacred 
history, but also to impart a knowledge of the principles of morality 
found in God's word, thus giving to the child that moral training 
which is so often neglected. 

This work is the first of a series of three grades now in preparation, 
each grade consisting of two books, one covering the Old and the other 
the New Testament history. 

Such notes, suggestions, and references as will be of benefit to 
the teacher are given on each lesson. These notes are found only 
in the Teachers' Edition. 

Several schools have already used the lessons in manuscript form 
with good results. It is with the hope that more good may be 
accomplished that they are now presented in the present form. 

E. B. M. 



CONTENTS. 



Chapter. Page. 

I. The Bible 9 

II. Heaven 10 

III. The Earth 11 

IV. Adam and Eve 11 

V. The Sabbath 12 

VI. Garden of Eden 13 

VII. Adam and Eve Disobey God 14 

VIII. The Serpent 15 

IX. Driven from Eden V 15 

X. Cain and Abel 17 

XI. Noah and his Grandfathers 19 

XII. Entering the Ark 20 

XIII. The Flood 20 

XIV. Leaving the Ark 22 

XV. Tower of Babel 23 

XVI. Abraham and Lot 24 

XVII. Abraham Helps Lot 25 

XVIII. Angels Visit Abraham 26 

XIX. Angels Visit Lot 28 

XX. Sodom Destroyed 29 

XXI. Isaac 30 

XXII. Jacob and Esau 31 

XXIII. Jacob Leaves Home 32 

XXIV. Giving to the Lord 33 

XXV. Jacob and Laban 34 

XXVI. Jacob Meets Esau 35 

XXVII. Joseph and his Dreams 36 

XXVIII. Joseph Sold by his Brothers 37 

XXIX. Joseph in Prison 38 

XXX. Joseph Before the King 39 

XXXI. Jacob's Sons Go to Egypt. 40 

XXXII. Joseph Meets his Brothers 41 

XXXIII. Jacob's Sons in Trouble 42 

(v) 



Vi CONTENTS. 

XXXIV. Benjamin Goes to Egypt 44 

XXXV. Finding the Silver Cup 45 

XXXVI. Joseph Makes Himself Known 46 

XXXVII. Jacob Meets Joseph 48 

XXXVIII. Death of Joseph , 49 

XXXIX. The Child Moses 50 

XL. Finding Moses 52 

XLI. Moses with the King's Daughter 53 

XLI1. Moses Leaves Egypt 54 

XLIII. God Sends Moses to Egypt 55 

XLIV. Moses and Aaron Before Pharaoh 57 

XLV. God Troubles Pharaoh 58 

XLVI. The Plagues of Lice and Flies 60 

XL VII. Other Plagues 61 

XLVIII. Locusts and Darkness 62 

XLIX. The Passover 63 

L. The Last Plague 64 

LI. Crossing the Red Sea 66 

L1I. The Manna 68 

LIIL Bringing Water from the Eock 69 

LIV. God on Mt. Sinai 70 

LV. Moses on the Mount 71 

LVI. The Tabernacle 72 

LVII. The Priests 74 

LVIII. The Quails 75 

LIX. The Spies 77 

LX. Many Israelites Destroyed 78 

LXI. Aaron's Rod 79 

LXII. Death of Aaron 81 

LXIII. Balaam the Prophet 82 

LXIV. Balaam Blesses the Israelites 83 

LXV. Moses Talks with the People 84 

LXVI. Death of Moses 85 

LXVII. Spies Sent to Jericho 86 

LXVIII. Crossing the Jordan 88 

LXIX. Taking Jericho 89 

LXX. Achan'sSin 90 

LXXI. The Gibeonites 91 

LXXII. Joshua Takes Canaan 93 

LXXI1I. Judges Chosen for God's People 94 

LXX1V. The Lord Comes to Gideon 95 



CONTENTS. Vll 

LXXV. The Fleece of Wool 96 

LXXVI. Gideon's Army 98 

LXXVII. Kuth 99 

LXXVIII. Boaz 100 

LXXIX. Samson and the Lion 102 

LXXX. Samson's Riddle 104 

LXXXI. Samson Taken by the Philistines 105 

LXXXIL Samson's Death 107 

LXXXIIL Little Samuel 109 

LXXXIV. The Ark Taken by the Philistines 110 

LXXXV. God Cares for the Ark 112 

' LXXXYI. The Israelites Want a King 113 

LXXXYII. Saul Chosen King 115 

LXXX VIII. Samuel Talks with the People 116 

LXXXIX. Saul Displeases the Lord 117 

XC. Saul again Disobeys the Lord 118 

XCI. David Chosen King 119 

XCII. Goliath the Giant 121 

XCIIL David Visits Saul's Army 122 

XCIV. David Meets Goliath 123 

XCV. Saul Tries to Kill David 125 

XCVI. David Leaves Saul 126 

XCVII. Saul Kills the Priests 128 

XCVIII. Jonathan Visits David 129 

XCIX. David Spares Saul's Life 130 

C. The Rich Man, Nabal 131 

CI. David again Spares Saul's Life 133 

CII. David at Ziglag 134 

Cin. Saul and the Witch 136 

CIV. Death of Saul and Jonathan 137 

CV. David Made King 138 

CVI. David Wishes to Build God a House 140 

CVII. David Helps Jonathan's Son 141 

CVIII. Absalom 142 

CIX. David Flees from Absalom 144 

CX. Death of Absalom 145 

CXI. David Returns to Jerusalem 148 

CXII. Death of David 149 

CXIIL Solomon as King 150 

CXIV. Solomon Builds God's House 152 

CXV. The Temple Finished 153 



Vlll 



CONTENTS. 



CXVI. The Queen of Sheba 154 

CXVII. Death of Solomon 156 

CXVIII. God's People Separate 157 

CXIX. Elijah the Prophet 158 

CXX. The Wicked Prophets 160 

CXXI. Elijah Fed by an Angel 162 

CXXI1. Elijah Taken to Heaven 163 

CXXIH. Children Mock Elisha 165 

CXXIV. The Wonderful Works of Elisha 167 

CXXV. Elisha Raises the Dead 168 

CXXYI. Naaman the Leper 170 

CXXYII. Death of Elisha 171 

CXXVIII. The Prophet Jonah 173 

CXXIX. Jonah Goes to Nineveh 174 

CXXX. King Hezekiah 176 

CXXXI. Hezekiah in Trouble 177 

CXXXII. Jerusalem Destroyed 179 

CXXXIII. Daniel Before the King 181 

CXXXIV. God Hears Daniel's Prayer 182 

CXXXY. Nebuchadnezzar's Dream 184 

CXXXYI. Nebuchadnezzar's Great Image 185 

CXXXYH. In the Fiery Furnace 186 

CXXXYIIL Nebuchadnezzar Driven from Home 187 

CXXXIX. The Writing on the Wall 188 

CXL. Destruction of Babylon 190 

CXLI. Daniel in the Lions' Den 192 

CXLII. Daniel Prays for his People 194 

CXLIII. The Jews Return to Jerusalem 195 

CXLIY. Rebuilding Jerusalem 196 

CXLY. Esther 198 

CXLYI. Esther before the King 199 

CXLYII. Esther Saves her People 200 

CXLYIII. Job 202 

CXLIX. Job and his Three Friends 203 



FIRST LESSONS 



OLD TESTAMENT 



LESSON I. 



THE BIBLE. 

Have you a Bible ? What does it talk about ? can you 
tell ? Have you ever heard the beautiful stories that are in 
it ? Some of you have, 
and you like them very 
much, I know. They are 
all true, and many of 
them were written on 
purpose for children. 

Besides being such a 
good story-book, the Bible 
is a great help to us in 
other ways. It shows us 
how to do right, and it 
tells us about G-od and 
his son Jesus. It also tells us about the people who lived a 
long time ago. 

God is a very great being, and it is he who gave us the 
Bible. He did not write it himself, but he told good men 
what to say, and they wrote it for him. 

G-od does not live upon this earth, but he is a real being, 
just as much as we are. He can hear, and see, and talk ; and 

(9) 




■'|lll[i|Hlij|r!l."jlv'?r.|,l 



BEADING THE BIBLE. 



10 HEAVEN. 

no matter where we are, he knows all we do and say. Even 
our thoughts are known to him. 

Although God is so great, still he is very kind, and he 
loves children when they are good. He calls himself their 
Heavenly Father, and he is always willing to help them to 
do right. 

It is God who makes us live, and he gives us all we have. 
The Bible is his letter to us. In it, he tells us about himself, 
and how we can best please him. 

In our next lesson we will learn about God's home. 



LESSON II. 



HEAVEN. 



In the Bible we read about a place called heaven. It is a 
country far beyond the clouds, and there God lives, and Jesus, 
his son. Their home is in a city, more beautiful than any we 
have ever seen. The houses are all of pure gold, and so 
are the streets. Around the city is a wall, built of glittering 
stones of different colors. In the wall are twelve gates, and 
each gate is a pearl. 

A river runs through this city, and on either side of the 
river is a tree called the tree of life. The fruit on this tree 
ripens every month, and it looks like apples of gold and of 
silver. 

There are many beings in heaven, — more than can be 
counted, — but they are all good, and none of them are ever 
sick, or have any trouble. They are all happy, and all can 
sing, and play on their harps. These holy, happy ones are 
called angels, and God is their king. 

In heaven there is no night, neither is there anything to 
hurt people, or make them afraid. God has promised that if 
we do right, we shall some day be like the angels, and live in 
this beautiful city with them. 




ADAM AND EVE. 11 

LESSON III. 
THE EARTH. 

Grod and his son Jesus and the angels were living long 
before this world was made. God made this earth on which 
we live, and Jesus helped him. 

The earth was all covered 
with water at first ; not the 
least spot of land could be 
seen, and eve^where it was 
darker than the darkest night 
you ever saw. There were 
no trees, no flowers, no birds, 
no animals, no people, and 
not even any fish in the THE EARTH . 

water. Everything was dark 
and still. Don't you think it must have been a lonely place? 

But G-od did not leave the earth so dark and dreary; he 
began right away to make all the pretty things we see around 
us. It took him just six days to make the earth, and every- 
thing upon it. 

The first day he made the light — not the bright sunshine, 
but such light as we have on dark, cloudy da} r s, when we can- 
not see the sun. The second day he made the sky and the air. 
The third day he gathered the water together, so that the dry 
land could be seen, and then he made the trees and grass to 
grow. On the fourth day he made the sun to shine, and that 
night he put the moon and the stars in the sky. 

LESSON IV. 

ADAM AND EVE. 

On the fifth day Grod continued his work, and made the 
birds and the fishes. On the sixth day he made the beasts, 



12 THE SABBATH. 

and all the animals that creep upon the earth. The same day 
he made a living man out of some of the dust of the ground. 
God made this man to look like himself, and named him Adam. 

At first, the man was all alone on the earth, with no one to 
talk to, or to be company for him. But G-od did not leave 
Adam alone very long. He soon made him fall into a very 
sound sleep ; and then he took from his side a rib, and closed 
up the flesh again. Out of this rib God made a woman ; and 
when Adam awoke, God gave her to him for his wife. Adam 
was much pleased with his wife. He called her Eve. 

What a wonderful being God must be, to have made all 
these things ! Try as hard as we might, we could not make 
even a tiny spear of grass. No one could do it, not even the 
greatest man that ever lived. 

God is not only great and wise, but he is kind too. If he 
were not, he would not have made all these beautiful things 
for us. Don't you think we ought to love God very much ? 



LESSON V. 
THE SABBATH. 

At the end of six days, God had finished all his work, and 
he said that everything he had made was very good. The sev- 
enth day he did not do any work, but rested, and called that 
day the Sabbath. 

God did not rest because he was tired, but because he 
wished to show us how we should do. He said he wanted all 
the people that should live upon the earth to do as he had 
done, — work six days, and rest the seventh. 

On the Sabbath the Lord wants us to put away our work 
and our play> and spend the day in thinking and reading 
about him. We ought to think of the many wonderful and 
beautiful things he has made for us, and of his goodness in 
letting us live to enjoy them. 



THE GARDEN OF EDEN. 13 

God never forgets us ; he knows all about us. He even 
knows how many hairs there are on our heads ; and not one 
little bird dies and falls to the ground, without his knowing it. 
We cannot see God, but he can see us ; and he knows when 
we do wrong, and when we do right. He knows, too, that we 
often forget people when we cannot see them ; so he tells us 
to spend every seventh day in thinking about him and the 
things he has made for us. If we do this, we shall never for- 
get G-od. 

• ♦ ■ 

LESSON VI. 

THE GARDEN OF EDEN. 

God gave Adam and Eve a beautiful place for a home. 
It was called the garden of Eden. In this lovely garden 
were all kinds of fruits, and flowers, and vines, and trees, and 
all the different birds and animals. 

The beasts were not then wild and fierce, as they are now, 
but all, even the lion and the tiger, were as gentle as lambs. 
Adam gave names to the birds and animals, and they all 
obeyed him. 

It is always best for people to have some work to do ; so 
the Lord told Adam and Eve that they might take care of 
the garden. What pleasant work it must have been ! There 
were no thistles nor thorns to trouble tbem, neither were there 
any weeds ; and although they might work all day long, they 
never felt sick or tired. 

Nothing in the garden ever withered or died. The flowers 
were always fresh and bright, and the grass always green. 
The fruit, too, was much nicer and larger than any we have 
now. 

God told Adam and Eve that they might eat of the fruit of 
every tree in the garden except one, and that was called the 



14 ADAM AND EYE DISOBEY GOD. 

tree of the knowledge of good and evil. He said that if they 
ate, or even touched, the fruit on that tree, they should surely 
die. Why, do you suppose, did God tell them not to eat the 
fruit of that tree ? Do n't you think he did it just to see if 
the}* would obey him ? 



LESSON VII. 

ADAM AXD EYE DISOBEY GOD. 

One day as Eve was walking in the garden alone, she came 
near the tree of knowledge, and stopped to look at its fruit. 
While there a serpent spoke to her. Eve thought this very 
strange, for she had never heard serpents talk before. 

The serpent asked her if God would let them eat of the 
fruit of every tree in the garden. She said, " Yes, all except 
one, the tree of knowledge of good and evil." She told him 
that God had said they must not eat the fruit of that tree, for 
if they did, they should surely die. The serpent said they 
would not surely die, but that they would be wiser, and more 
like God, if they ate of it. 

He kept on talking about the fruit, and what it would do, 
until Eve took some of the fruit and ate it. When she saw 
that she did not feel sick, nor at all like dying, but that the 
fruit had a very nice taste, she took some to Adam, and he 
ate of it too. 

Adam and Eve did very wrong indeed to eat this fruit. 
God had told them plainly not to touch it. He did not tell 
them why, but that should have made no difference. They 
ought to have known that God knew what was best for them. 
He had been very kind to them, and they ought to have obeyed 
him. 

Adam and Eve did not die right away, and we shall learn 
more about them b}* and b}*. 



DRIVEN FROM EDEN. 15 

LESSON VIII. 

THE SERPENT. 

Before we study any more about Adam and Eve, perhaps 
you would like to know who the serpent was that talked with 
Eve. 

Before the earth was made, one of the angels in heaven, 
now called Satan, became wicked, and would not obey God. 
Some of the other angels joined with Satan, and became 
wicked too, so God had to turn them all out of heaven. They 
were very angry with God because of this, and tried in every 
way to make him all the trouble they could. 

They soon found out that God had made a man and a 
woman, and placed them in Eden. They also knew that God 
had told Adam and Eve not to eat of the fruit on a certain tree. 
After thinking the matter over, Satan made up his mind that 
he would, if possible, get Adam and Eve to disobey God by 
eating of that fruit. Seeing Eve alone in the garden, he 
made himself look like a serpent, and went where she was. 
He then, as you have learned, talked with her until she 
believed him instead of God. 

Satan is still alive, and on the earth. We cannot see him, 
but he is here, and is always trying to make us disobey God. 
Whenever we feel like doing wrong, we may be sure he is very 
near. 

In a little while, God is going to burn up Satan and the 
wicked angels. We, too, shall be destroyed with them, if we 
listen to Satan instead of God. 



LESSON IX. 

DRIVEN FROM EDEN. 

After Adam and Eve had eaten of the forbidden fruit, they 
began to feel very unhappy indeed. They were afraid to meet 



DRIVEN FROM EDEN. 



God ; and toward evening, when they heard him walking in the 
garden, they hid themselves among the trees. Always before, 
they had been glad to have Gk>d visit them ; but now they were 
ashamed, and did not want to see him. 




DRIYEX FR03I THE GARDEN OP EDEN. 



God called to Adam, and said, " Where art thou? " Adam 
answered, "I heard thy voice in the garden, and I hid myself 
because I was afraid." Grod then asked him if he had eaten of 
the tree of which he had been commanded not to eat. Adam 



CAIN AND ABEL. 17 

answered, " The woman whom thou gavest me, she gave me of 
the tree, and I did eat." God then turned to Eve, and said, 
"What hast thou done?" She said, "The serpent deceived 
me, and I did eat." 

God then told Adam and Eve that because of their sin, 
they must leave the lovely garden, and find another home. He 
said the earth would no longer be as beautiful as it was then. 
There should now be thorns and thistles and weeds, and many 
things to trouble them and cause them sorrow. They would 
have to work hard, and would often feel lonely and tired and 
sick, and by and by they would have to die. 

God and Jesus and the holy angels were greatly grieved 
because of Adam and Eve's sin. They knew that this first 
man and woman must now die, with all who should ever live 
upon the earth after them, and they were very sorrowful. 

The Father and the Son began to plan some way to help 
them, and at last it was thought best that Jesus should come 
to this world and die for them. In no other way could they be 
saved. This was a great thing for Jesus to do, but he was will- 
ing ; and God, because of his great love for the people of this 
earth, said he would give his dear Son. 

The plan was then made known to Adam and Eve. The 
angels told them that they must leave the garden and after a 
time die ; but if they did right, and loved God and his Son, 
they should sometime live again, and have a home with 
them in heaven. 



LESSON X. 

CAIN AND ABEL. 

Adam and Eve had two sons, Cain and Abel. Abel was a 
shepherd and tended sheep, and Cain was a farmer. Abel was 
good, and always did as the Lord told him, but Cain was 
wicked. 



18 



CAIN AND ABEL. 



The Lord told them each to take a lamb, and kill it, and 
burn it on an altar, such as you see in this picture. He wanted 
them to do this to show that they believed Jesus was going to 
die for them. "When Jesus promised to come to this earth and 
die, it was not for Adam and Eve only, but for all who should 
ever live upon the earth ; and God wanted people to make 
these offerings to show that they believed this. Abel did as 

the Lord had 
commanded, but 
Cain did not. 
He brought 
some of the 
things that 
grow from the 
ground, instead 
of a lamb. 

After they 
had everything 
all ready, and 
their offerings 
-upon the altars, 
God sent down 
fire from heaven 
to burn Abel's offering, but upon Cain's he sent no fire. God 
took this way to show that he was pleased with Abel's offering, 
and not with Cain's. 

Cain was very angry because God did not accept his offer- 
ing. It made him jealous of Abel too, and one da}', when they 
were in the field alone, he killed Abel. God punished Cain for 
his wickedness, and made him have much trouble all his life. 
TTe see from this story of Cain and Abel that God wants us 
to do just as he tells us. "When he speaks, he wants us to mind 
every time. ^Ye should always be glad to do this, for God is 
very good to us, and gives us everything we have. 




CAIN AND ABEL MAKING THEIR OFFERINGS. 



NOAH AND HIS GRANDFATHERS. "19 

After a time God gave Adam another son to take the place 
of the one who was killed. This son was named Seth, and he 
was good, like his brother Abel. 

Adam and Eve lived upon the earth a long time, but at last 
the}' had to die, as God had told them. At the time of his 
death, Adam was nine hundred and thirty years old. 



LESSON XI. 
NOAH AND HIS GRANDFATHERS. 

A long time after Adam died, there lived a man named 
Noah. He was a very good man, and was always willing to do 
as the Lord said. 

He had a great-grandfather who never died. His name was 
Enoch. He was so good that God took him to heaven to live. 
Noah never saw him, for he was taken from the earth before 
Noah was born. 

Noah's grandfather's name was Methuselah. He lived 
longer than any other man that has been on the earth. When 
he died, he was very nearly a thousand years old. He lived 
with Adam a long time, and probably heard him tell about his 
home in the garden of Eden. Noah must have known about 
it too, for his grandfather would surely have told him about 
Adam, the first man, and his lovely home. 

At the time Noah lived, there were many people upon the 
earth, but most of them were wicked. They were so very bad 
that God made up his mind to drown them all in a flood of 
water. 

He made known to Noah what he was going to do, and 
told him to make a large ship, or ark, so that all the good peo- 
ple might be saved in it when the flood came. 

Noah began right away to build the ark, and no doubt his 
grandfather helped him, for he was a good man, and believed 
God. He died just before the flood came. 



20 THE FLOOD. 

LESSON XII. 

ENTERING THE ARK. 

While Noah was building the ark, he preached to the peo- 
ple. He told them about the flood that was coming, and tried 
to have them do right, so they could be saved ; but they would 
not listen to him. They only laughed at him, and made fun of 
the ark. They would not believe there could be a flood. 

But Noah believed God. He did not mind what the people 
said about him, because he knew that he was doing right. He 
kept on working and preaching for more than a hundred j T ears. 

At last the work was done. The ark was finished, and 
Noah took into it food for all that were to be saved. The ark 
looked very much like a large house. It had a window in the 
top, and a door in the side, and was three stories high. 

When everything was ready, God told Noah and his family 
to go into the ark. There were only eight of them. All the 
rest of the people on the earth were wicked. 

After Noah and his family entered the ark, the birds and 
animals began to go in. They came from all the woods and 
fields around. Even the wild and fierce ones came, and went 
qui etly into the ark. No one could see that an}'body was lead- 
ing them, but there must have been angels with them to show 
them where to go. 

Not all the animals went into the ark, but just a few of each 
kind. God had told Noah that they were coming, so he had 
plenty for them to eat. After all had gone in, an angel shut 
the door. 



LESSON XIII. 

THE FLOOD. 

For seven daj T s after Noah entered the ark, the sky was as 
clear as ever. Not the least sign of rain could be seen, and the 



THE FLOOD. 



21 



people thought that Noah was surely mistaken about the flood. 
They then mocked, and made fun of the ark, as it stood there, 
a great ship on dry land. They seemed to be more wicked than 
ever. 

During this time Noah was arranging things in the ark. 
The animals had to be put in their places, and everything 
made ready for their long stay. No doubt God made the ani- 
mals kind and gentle, so that none of them would harm Noah 
and his family. 

On the eighth day the sky began to look black. The light- 
ning darted from the angry 
clouds, and the heavy thunder 
made everything tremble. The 
people had never seen anything 
so terrible before, and they 
were much afraid. 

Soon the rain began to pour 
down, aDd then those wicked 
people knew that a flood was 
surely coming. Oh, how the}' 
then wished that they had list- 
ened to what Noah had told them ! They tried to get into 
the ark, but it was of no use. An angel had shut the door, 
and no man could open it, not even Noah. 

For forty days and forty nights it rained without stopping. 
The water rose higher and higher, until the hills, and finally the 
highest mountains were covered. The people and animals tried 
to save themselves by getting upon high places, but the water 
reached them after a time, wherever they climbed ; and at last 
all were drowned. 

The ark tossed about upon the waters, but God cared for it, 
and Noah was not afraid. God alwa}-s cares for those who 
obey him, and keeps them from all harm. 




22 



LEAVING- THE ARK. 



LESSON XIV. 



LEAVING THE ARK. 

After a time the Lord caused a strong wind to blow, and 
the waters began to dr} T up from off the earth. The ark then 
rested on the top of a mountain. 

Noah had been in the ark nearly a year, and he was anxious 

to get out as soon 
as possible. He 
thought he could 
tell whether the 
ground was dry or 
not by sending out 
some birds. If 
they found the 
earth covered with 
water so that they 
could get nothing 
to eat, he knew 
they would come 
back to the ark. 

Noah opened 
the window, and 
sent out first a 
raven. It flew 
back and forth 
from the ark, and 
seemed to find no place of rest. He then sent forth a dove. 
She soon came back, and Noah took her into the ark. After 
waiting seven days, he sent the dove out again. This time she 
came back with a leaf in her mouth. Noah knew then that 
the earth was getting dry. He waited a few days longer, and 
sent the dove out the third time ; and she never came back. 
Noah then removed the covering of the ark, and looked out, 




XOAH MAKING HIS OFFERING. 



TOWER OF BABEL. '!'■) 

and he saw that the water was gone. An angel came, and 
opened the door, and God told Noah to go out and take with 
him all that were in the ark. Noah did as the Lord said, 
and afterward he made offerings, as Abel had clone. 

For a while there was not very much for Noah and his 
family to eat. All the fruits and grains had been destroyed. 
God knew that it would take some time for these things to 
grow again, so he told Noah that he might kill some of the 
animals and eat them. 

God promised Noah that there should never be another 
flood over the whole earth. To show us that he will keep this 
promise, he has put the beautiful rainbow in the cloud. When 
you are looking at the rainbow, do you ever think that God 
is looking at it too ? He is ; for he told Noah that he would 
look upon the bow, and remember his promise. 



LESSON XV. 
TOWER OF BABEL. 

After the flood, Noah's family became very large. His 
sons had children, and grandchildren, and great-grandchildren, 
and so the people increased until there were very many upon 
the earth. They then began to grow wicked again. 

A few were good, but many were bad. Those that were wicked 
did not like to live where the good people were, so they went 
off by themselves, and lived in another country. There they 
built a city. They also began to build a house, or tower, which 
was to be so high that the top would be up among the clouds. 

They thought that if they should build such a very high 
tower, everybody would hear about it, and speak well of them. 
It may be, too, that they were afraid another flood might come. 
If it did, the}- thought they could go up into the top of the 
tower, and be above the water. 



24 



ABRAHAM AND LOT. 



Now Grod knew why these wicked people were making the 
tower so high, and he was not at all pleased with them. He 

thought it best 
to stop their 
work. He did 
this by making 
them speak dif- 
fer e nt lan- 
guages. Before 
this, all the peo- 
ple on the earth 
talked just 
alike, and could 
understand one 
another easily, 
but now they 
could not talk 
together at all. 
This made them 
so much trouble that they had to give up their work. Ever 
since that time, people in different parts of the world have 
spoken different languages. This is why we cannot understand 
many of the people who come here from other countries. 

The tower was left unfinished, and- the people separated. 
The}' did not live together in one city as before^ but went to 
different places. The city they built was called Babel. 




THE TOWER OF BABEL. 



LESSON XVI. 

ABRAHAM AND LOT. 

We will now study about a man named Abraham. He was 
one of the best men that has ever lived upon the earth. When- 
ever God told him to do anything, he did it without asking any 
questions. 



ABRAHAM HELPS LOT. 25 

The first time G-od came to him, he told him to leave his 
home, and go into another country to live. Abraham took 
Sarah his wife and Lot his nephew, and did as the Lord had 
said. "When the} T reached the country to which God had sent 
them, the}^ found there was a famine in the land. They then 
went on to another countiy, and stayed there until the famine 
was over. 

Abraham and Lot both became very rich in this land. The}?- 
had hundreds of servants, and a great many cattle and eheep. 
When they came again to the country which was to be their 
home, their flocks and herds were so large that they could not 
live in the same place, and find pasture for them all. 

"When they came to separate, Abraham told Lot that he 
might take his choice of the land. Lot did so, and took the 
very best, leaving the poorer land for Abraham. It was not 
kind in Lot to do this way. He ought to have let his 
uncle choose first, or else to have taken some of the poorer 
land himself. 

In those days Abraham and Lot lived in tents. Lot pitched 
his tent in a beautiful place near a city called Sodom. After 
a time he went into the cit} T , and lived in a house. The peo- 
ple of Sodom were very wicked, and we shall soon see that Lot 
did a very foolish thing when he went to live with them. 



LESSON XVII. 
ABRAHAM HELPS LOT. 

Abraham pitched his tent in a rough, hilly country, several 
miles from Sodom. He had to take the poorer land ; but God 
was with him, and everything he did seemed to prosper. 

Abraham loved Lot, and although living quite a distance 
from him, always had a great care for him. 

After a time the people of Sodom had a war with the people 



26 AXGELS VISIT ABRAHAM. 

of another country, and man}- of them, with all that they had, 
were carried away. Among those who were taken was Lot. 

When the word came to Abraham that Lot had been carried 
away by these people, he took over three hundred of his serv- 
ants, and with three other men and their servants, followed 
after them, and saved Lot, and all the people and goods that 
had been taken from the city. 

Lot was very thankful for his uncle's kindness, and so was 
the king of Sodom. The king wanted Abraham to take the 
goods he had brought back, for his pay. Abraham took some 
for the Lord, and for those who went with him, but he would 
not take anything for himself. 

We know that Abraham must have been veiy rich at this 
time, or he would not have had so many servants. While he 
was getting along so well on his poor land, Lot was having 
trouble, and everything seemed to be against him. Why do 
you think this was ? Perhaps the Lord let these things come 
upon Lot to show him that it is not right always to take the 
best for ourselves. God likes to have people care for others' 
wants as well as their own, and so he helped Abraham in all 
that he did. 



LESSON XVIII. 

ANGELS VISIT ABRAHAM. 

One day, as Abraham was sitting in the door of his tent, he 
saw three men coming. They were strangers to him, but he 
went out to meet them, and asked them to come and rest in the 
shade of the trees. The men were glad to do so, for the da}- 
was very warm, and they seemed tired. Abraham brought 
them some water to wash their feet, and said that he would 
also bring them something to eat. 

In that country the people wore very low shoes. The soles 
of our shoes tied on with strings would look much like 



ANGELS VISIT ABRAHAM. 



27 



them. These shoes were called sandals, and they did not 
keep the dust off very well, so people had to bathe their feet 
very often. Almost the first thing a person did when his 
friends came to see him, was to give them water to wash their 
feet. 

Abraham hurried into the tent, and asked Sarah to make 
some meal cakes. He then went out, and got a nice calf, which 
he gave to a servant to kill and dress. This they cooked, and 
with the cakes, and 
some butter and milk, 
gave it to the men for 
their dinner. 

When the men rose 
to go, Abraham went a 
little way with them. 
The men then told him 
that they were going 
to destroy the city of 
Sodom, because the 
people who lived there 
were so wicked. Abra- 
ham then knew that 

. , SANDALS. 

the men were angels. 

Two of them went on toward Sodom, but the other one stayed, 

and talked with Abraham. 

Abraham remembered that Lot was still living in Sodom, 
and perhaps some other good people also, and he urged the 
angel to save the city for the sake of the good persons who 
might be there. They had quite a long talk, and at last the 
angel promised that no harm should come to the city if ten 
good people could be found in it. The angel then went away, 
and Abraham returned to his tent. 





28 



ANGELS VISIT LOT. 



LESSON XIX. 



ANGELS VISIT LOT. 

Toward evening, as Lot was sitting at the gate of Sodom, 
he saw two men coming. These men were angels, the same 
ones who had eaten dinner with Abraham a few hours before. 
Lot did not know they were angels, but supposed them to be 
some strangers who had come to visit the city. 

When they came near, Lot rose to meet them, and bowed to 

them very politely. In those 
da}*s people did not shake 
hands, as they do now, but 
bowed very low, sometimes 
down to the ground. 

Lot asked the men to go 

to his house and stay all 

night. They said they would 

stay in the street, but Lot 

urged them to go with him, 

and finally they did so. Lot's 

wife was very kind to the men. 

bowing. She baked bread, and made a 

good supper for them. 

That evening, before it was time to go to bed, the wicked 

men of the city came to Lot's house, and told him to bring the 

strangers out, so they could see theni. Lot did not want to do 

this, for he thought it would be wrong to treat the strangers so 

rudely. He went out, and tried to have the men go away. 

This made them very angry with Lot, and just as they were 

about to break open the door of his house, the men inside 

reached out, and pulled Lot into the house, and then shut the 

door again. 

When the angels saw what the wicked men outside were 
trying to do, they made them blind, so they could not find the 




SODOM DESTROYED. 29 

door. Lot then knew that the men were angels. They told 
him to take his wife and children, and leave the city, for the 
Lord had sent them to destro}" it. 



LESSON XX. 
SODOM DESTROYED. 

When the angels came to Lot, he had with him in the house 
his wife and two daughters. He had other friends living in the 
city, and in the night the angels sent him to warn them. He 
told them what God was going to do, and urged them to go 
away, but they would not believe him. 

Lot himself seemed in no hurry to leave the cit}\ He no 
doubt thought of his home and friends, and was sorry to leave 
them. But the angels urged him to take his family and go at 
once. They said that if he did not, he would be destroyed 
with the city. It was then daylight, but still he lingered. At 
last the angels took him by the hand, with his wife and two 
daughters, and led them out of the city. 

The angels told them to go awa}' quickly, and not to look 
behind them. They said they must not sta} T near the city, but 
flee to the mountains. Lot feared some harm might come to 
them in the mountains, so he asked the angels to let them go 
to a little city which was near by. The angels said they might 
do so, and then left them. 

Lot's wife did not do as she was told, but looked back to 
see the cit} T , and God turned her into a pillar of salt. 

About sunrise God sent fire from heaven upon Sodom, and 
it was burned, with everything in it. Early that morning 
Abraham went out and looked toward Sodom, and he saw the 
smoke of the city as it was burning. 

Lot lost his wife, and nearly everything he had, but it was 
his own fault. If he had stayed away from these wicked peo- 
ple, he would not have had all this trouble. God is not pleased 



30 



ISAAC. 



to have us with wicked people unless we can do something to 
make them better. Little children, as well as grown people, 
need to remember this, for very often good children become 
bad by playing with those who are wicked. 




.BBAHA3I OFFERING ISAAC. 



LESSON XXI. 

ISAAC. 

Abraham had a son who was named Isaac. He was a good 
child, and his parents loved him dearly. 

"When he had grown to be a tall boy, G-od told Abraham to 
go to a certain mountain, and build an altar, and there offer 
his son Isaac, instead of a lamb. 



JACOB AND ESAU. 31 

Abraham asked no questions, but the next morning he took 
some wood for a fire, two servants, and Isaac, and started for 
the mountain. When they came near the place where the offer- 
ing was to be made, Abraham told the servants to stay behind, 
while he and Isaac went to burn the offering. 

Isaac carried the wood, and his father took the knife and 
the fire. On their way, Isaac asked his father where the lamb 
was for the offering. Abraham told him that Grod would give 
them the lamb. 

When they came to the mountain, Abraham built an altar, 
and put the wood on it, and then he tied Isaac's hands and 
feet, and laid him upon the wood. Isaac was probably strong 
enough to get away from his father, if he had wished to do so, 
but he did not. He knew that his father loved him, and would 
do what was right. He was willing to die, if Grod thought 
it best. 

Abraham took the knife, and was raising his hand to kill 
Isaac, when the Lord called to him, and told him not to touch 
the boy. The Lord said he knew now that Abraham feared 
him. 

Looking up, Abraham saw a lamb caught in some brush, and 
he took the lamb, and offered it upon the altar instead of Isaac. 
The Lord was much pleased that Abraham had been so willing 
to obey him, and he made of Isaac a great and good man. 



LESSON XXII. 

JACOB AND ESAU. 

When Isaac grew to be a man, he had two sons, Jacob and 
Esau. Esau was a hunter, and spent much of his time in the 
fields and woods, looking for wild animals. He did not kill 
them with a gun, as men do now, but used a bow and arrows. 
Jacob did not care to go hunting ; he liked better to tend the 



32 JACOB LEAVES HOME. 

Isaac loved Esau more than he did Jacob, but Rebekah, 
their mother, thought more of Jacob. 

When Isaac became very old, and almost blind, he told 
Esau to go to the field, and get him some venison, and he 
would bless him before he died. Rebekah heard what Isaac 
said ; and as soon as Esau was gone, she sent Jacob for two 
kids. These she killed, and cooked very nicely. She then 
dressed Jacob in some of Esau's clothes, and told him to take 
the meat to his father, and say that he was Esau, so that he. 
could have the blessing, instead of his brother. 

Now Esau was a hairy man, and in order that Jacob might 
seem hairy too, Rebekah covered his hands and neck with the 
skins of the kids. 

Jacob then went to his father, and told him that he was 
Esau, and that he had brought him some venison. His father 
asked him how he came to get it so quickly. Jacob said that 
the Lord had brought it to him. Isaac then felt of his son's 
hands. He said the voice sounded like Jacob's, but the hands 
were Esau's. Isaac then blessed Jacob, thinking that he was 
Esau. 

LESSON XXIII. 

JACOB LEAVES HOME. 

Jacob received the blessing, but he took a wicked way to 
get it. He deceived and told lies, and that was wrong. Grod 
always punishes people who tell wrong stories, and we shall 
soon see that he punished Jacob and his mother. 

When Esau came in with the venison, and heard what Jacob 
had done, he was very angry. He hated his brother, and said 
he would kill him sometime. 

Rebekah heard what Esau intended to do, so she urged 
Isaac to send Jacob awaj T . Isaac did as she wished, and sent 
Jacob to live with his Uncle Laban, whose home was far away 
in another country. 



GIVING TO TIJE LORD. 33 

Rebekah did not think Jacob would be gone long ; for she 
thought Esau would soon get over his angry feelings, and then 
Jacob could come home. But Jacob had to stay away many 
years, and his mother never saw him again. It may be that 
God kept him away on purpose to punish Rebekah for help- 
ing to deceive Isaac. 

Jacob started for his uncle's home alone and on foot. In 
those days people did not have cars to ride in, but had to go 
either afoot, or upon camels. 

The first day, Jacob walked nearly fifty miles, and when it 
came night, he was very tired. He did not have a bed, or even 
a house, to sleep in, but he lay down on the ground, and took 
some stones for a pillow. He could not have been afraid, for 
he was soon fast asleep, and dreaming a very strange dream. 

He thought he saw a ladder standing on the earth, and 
reaching to heaven. Angels were going up and down on the 
ladder, and the Lord stood at the top. He thought the Lord 
talked with him, and promised to give him much land, and to 
care for him, and sometime bring him back to his father's house. 



LESSON XXIV. 
GIVING TO THE LORD. 

When Jacob awoke, he knew that he had been dreaming, 
but he felt that Grod had given him his dream. He told the 
Lord that if he would be with him and give him food to eat 
and clothes to wear, and would sometime let him go back to his 
old home, he would return to the Lord a part of all he might 
let him have. 

Now the Lord gives people everything they have, — all their 
food, and clothes, and houses, and monejr, — and it pleases 
him to have them give him something in return. 

We can give to the Lord in many ways. We can let him 
have a part of all we earn ; and whenever our friends make us 



34 JACOB AND LABAN. 

presents of money, we can gi^e him some of that. And then 
we can give to him by giving to poor people. The Bible says 
that if we give to the poor, it is just the same as giving to the 
Lord. 

The next morning after Jacob had his dream, he went on 
his way. After traveling several days, he saw a well in a field, 
with sheep lying by it. Men were standing near tbe sheep to 
watch them. Jacob went to the men, and asked them if they 
knew Laban, his uncle. They said they did, and that his 
daughter Rachel was then coming with her father's flocks. It 
seems that she was bringing them to the well to water them. 

When Rachel came near, Jacob watered the sheep for her, 
and then told her that he was her cousin, She ran quickly 
to the house, and told her father, and he came out to meet 
Jacob. He seemed glad to see him, and kissed him, and took 
him to his house. 



LESSON XXV. 
JACOB AND LABAN. 

Jacob lived with his Uncle Laban twenty years, and tended 
his cattle and flocks. He did not get any money for his work, 
but had a share of the cattle and sheep and goats. His 
uncle also gave him Rachel and her sister Leah for his wives. 

Jacob did not have a very pleasant time. He had to work 
hard, and his uncle was sometimes unkind to him ; but Jacob 
tried to do right, and G-od helped him. 

After Jacob had been away from home many years, and 
had children and servants and cattle of his own, (lod came 
to him one night, and told him to go back to his old home. 
Jacob told Rachel and Leah what the Lord had said, and after 
thinking the matter over, they said they would go with him ; 
so Jacob gathered together all that he had, and went away. 

Laban was away from home at the time, shearing sheep, 
and did not know that Jacob was going to leave him. When 



JACOB MEETS ESAU. 33 

he heard that Jacob had gone, he was very angry. He took 
some men with him, and went after Jacob to make him come 
back. On the way an angel came to Laban in a dream, and 
told him to let Jacob go, and to do him no harm. 

Laban still followed Jacob, and after seven days, overtook 
him one night near a mountain. He spoke quite angrily to 
Jacob at first, but did not dare to make him go back because 
of what the angel had said. 

The next morning Laban kissed his daughters and their 
children, and bidding them good-by, went back to his home. 



LESSON XXVI. 

JACOB MEETS ESAU. 

After Laban had gone, Jacob went on his way. He had 
to travel slowly, for the women and children became tired 
easily, and the flocks could not go far in a day. 

Jacob sent some of his servants ahead to see how Esau 
felt toward him. They brought back word that Esau was 
coming to meet him with four hundred men. This frightened 
Jacob, for he thought his brother was still angry with him, 
and was coming to kill him. Hoping in some way to please 
Esau, Jacob sent his servants back with a present of cattle 
and sheep and other animals. 

But Jacob was still troubled, and did not sleep any that 
night. He was afraid that God was now going to let him 
be killed for deceiving his father, and taking the blessing 
from his brother. He spent the whole night alone, praying 
G-od to forgive him. „ While praying, a man came to him and 
began to wrestle with him. At first Jacob thought the man 
was a robber, but after a time he saw that he was an angel, 
and then Jacob would not let him go until he blessed him. 

In the morning Jacob started on his journey again, and it 
was not long before he saw Esau coming. As he came near, 



36 JOSEPH AND HIS DREAMS. 

Jacob bowed down to the ground seven times. He was still 
afraid that his brother would kill him ; but Esau, instead of 
being angry with Jacob, ran to meet him, and putting his 
arms around his neck, kissed him. God had forgiven Jacob, 
and he had put it into Esau's heart to forgive him too. 

After doing all he could for his brother, Esau went back 
home, and Jacob followed on slowty. Rachel died on the 
way, and Jacob buried her, and set a pillar upon her grave. 

When Jacob came to his old home, he found his father 
alive, but his mother was dead. Isaac died not long after, 
and Jacob and Esau buried him. 



LESSON XXVII. 
JOSEPH AND HIS DREAMS. 

Jacob and Esau had large flocks and herds. Because of 
this they could not live in the same place, and find pasture 
for all their cattle. So Jacob stayed near the old home, and 
Esau moved to another country. 

At this time Jacob had twelve sons. Benjamin was the 
youngest, and Joseph the next older. Joseph was a very 
good boy, and his father loved him best of all his sons, and 
made for him a beautiful coat of many colors. This made 
the older brothers hate Joseph, and they would not speak 
pleasantly to him. 

By and by Joseph had two strange dreams. He dreamed 
first that he was in the field with his brothers, binding grain, 
and he thought their sheaves stood around, and bowed to his 
sheaf. He next dreamed that the sun, the moon, and eleven 
stars bowed to him. 

Joseph's brothers did not like these dreams at all, and 
they hated him ail the more. They seemed to think that the 
sheaves and eleven stars meant themselves, and that some- 
time they would have to bow down to Joseph, as people 
do to kings and great men. 



JOSEPH SOLD BY HIS BROTHERS. 37 

Joseph's brethren tended their father's flocks, and some- 
times had to take them quite far from home to get good 
pasture. One time, when the} T had been away several da}-s, 
Jacob told Joseph to go and find his brothers, and see if they 
were well, and if the flocks were all right. At this time 
Joseph was about seventeen years old. 

When the brothers saw Joseph coming, they said one to 
another, "Let us kill him, and throw him into some dark hole, 
or pit, and then tell his father that some wild beast has eaten 
him." In our next lesson we will see what these wicked 
brothers did. 

LESSON XXVIII. 
JOSEPH SOLD BY HIS BROTHERS. 

When Joseph's brothers spoke of killing him, one brother, 
named Reuben, did not want to do it. He said, " Let us not 
kill him, but let us take him off into the wilderness, and put 
him in some pit." Heuben said this, hoping that he might 
in some way get a chance to help Joseph. He felt more 
kindly toward his 3^oung brother than the others did, and he 
wished to save his life. He did not dare to let his feelings 
be known, so he wanted to have Joseph put into a pit, in- 
tending to take him out and send him to his father when the 
others did not know it. The brothers agreed to do as Reuben 
said, and when Joseph came up, they stripped off his pretty 
coat, and threw him into the pit. 

By aud by Joseph's brothers sat down to eat their dinner, 
and looking up, they saw coming toward them a company of 
men, with camels. These men were merchants. They were 
taking spices and other goods to a country called Egypt. 

When the brothers saw these men, they thought they would 
better sell Joseph, and get rid of him in that way. The 
merchants were willing to buy him, so he was taken from the 
pit, and sold for twenty pieces of silver. Reuben was not 



38 



JOSEPH IN PRISON. 



with his brothers at the time, and when he came to the pit 
and found that Joseph was gone, he was much troubled. 

These cruel brothers knew that they must have some 
stoiy to tell their father when they met him. They had kept 

Joseph's coat, 
and with this 
they hoped to 
deceive him. So, 
killing a kid, they 
dipped the coat 
in the blood, and 
carried it to their 
father. They 
said, "This have 
we found. Is it 
thy son's coat or 
not? " Jacob 
It is my son's coat. 




JACOB DECEIVED BY HIS SONS. 



knew the coat at once, and he said, 
Some wild beast has torn him in pieces." 

Jacob wept, and he would not be comforted. He said 
that he should mourn for Joseph as long as he lived. 



LESSON XXIX. 



JOSEPH IN PRISON. 

The merchants took Joseph to Egypt, and sold him to an 
officer of King Pharaoh. Joseph's master was very kind to 
him at first, but after a while the master's wife told a wicked 
story about Joseph, and he was put in prison. 

Joseph had not done anything wrong, and while in prison, 
he was so good and kind that everybody liked him. The 
keeper of the prison even trusted him to care for the other 
prisoners. 



JOSEPH BEFORE THE KING. 39 

After a time two of the king's servants were put in the 
prison. One morning, when Joseph went to their cells to see 
them, he noticed that they were very sad. He asked them why 
they looked so sober. They said they had each had a dream, 
and there was no one to show them the meaning. Joseph 
asked them to tell him their dreams. They did so, and Joseph 
told what they meant. He said that in three days one of the 
servants would be taken back to the king's house, but the 
other, the king would hang on a tree. 

Ever3 T thing came to pass as Joseph had said it would. One 
man was hung, and the other was taken back to his place. 
Joseph asked the servant who was to go back to the king to re- 
member him, and speak well of him to his master, that he too 
might be taken from the prison. But the servant, as soon as 
he was out of trouble, seemed to forget Joseph. He did not 
tell the king about him, nor try to help him in any way, and 
so Joseph had to stay in the prison. 



LESSON XXX. 
JOSEPH BEFORE THE KING. 

At the end of two years, the king himself had a strange 
dream. He thought that he was standing by the river, and 
saw, coming up out of the river, seven fat cows, which began 
to feed in a meadow near by. Afterward there came up out 
of the river seven lean cows, and they ate up the fat ones. 

The king then awoke, but he soon fell asleep and dreamed 
again. This time he saw seven full ears of corn upon one 
stalk. After them came up seven poor ears, and they de- 
voured the good ones. 

This dream troubled the king very much, and the next 
morning he sent for his wise men, who pretended to know a 
great deal about dreams and such things ; but when they came 
to the king and heard his dream, they could not explain it. 



40 JACOB'S SONS GO TO EGYPT. 

Then the king's servant who had been in the prison remem- 
bered Joseph. He told the king that while in prison, he had a 
dream, and a certain young man there gave him the true mean- 
ing of it. 

The king then sent for Joseph quickly, and they brought 
him out of the prison. When he came in, the king asked him if 
he could tell the meaning of dreams. Joseph answered that he 
could not of himself, but that God would help him. 

The king then told his dream, and Joseph understood it at 
once. He said the seven fat cows and the seven full ears were 
seven years when there would be great plenty in the land, and 
that the seven lean cows and the seven poor ears were seven 
years of famine, when nothing would grow. He said that God 
had given the dream twice to show that it would soon come to 
pass. 

Joseph then told the king that he ought to choose some 
wise man to go through the land and gather grain during the 
time of plenty. He said this grain should be stored away in 
the cities, so that when the famine came, the people could go 
there and buy food. 

The king was much pleased with Joseph. He saw that 
God was with him, and that he was very wise, so he said that 
Joseph should be the man to gather the grain. 

The king gave him some nice presents, and dressed him 
in fine clothes, and let him ride in a grand carriage. He told 
the people that when they met Joseph, they must bow down 
to him and obey him, as they would their king ; so Joseph be- 
came a great man in Egypt. 



LESSON XXXI. 
JACOB'S SONS GO TO EGYPT. 
During the seven years of plenty, Joseph went over all the 
land of Egypt gathering grain, and storing it away in the 
cities. At the end of that time the famine came. 



JOSEPH MEETS HIS BROTHERS. -41 

The people soon used up all their own food, and then they 
began to ciy to the king for bread. The king would say to 
them, " Gro to Joseph, and whatever he says to you, do ;" and so 
Joseph sold food to the hungry people. 

Had it not been for this grain that was stored away, many 
of the people would have died. No doubt they loved Joseph 
for what he had done, and were quite willing to treat him as 
a king when the} 7 " saw that he had saved their lives. 

The famine was in other places as well as in Egypt. It was 
in the country where Joseph lived before he was sold. His 
father and brothers were living there still, and they were afraid 
they would have to die for want of food. 

After a while Jacob heard that there was grain in Egypt, 
so he sent his sons to that country to buy corn. He had with 
him at that time eleven sons, and he sent them all except Ben- 
jamin, the youngest. It was a long way to Egypt, and Jacob 
would not let Benjamin go with the others, for. fear that some 
harm might come to him. Ever since Joseph had been awaj', 
Jacob seemed to think the most of Benjamin, and was very 
careful of him. One reason of this may have been that Ben- 
jamin was Joseph's own brother, while the others were only 
half-brothers. 



LESSON XXXII. 
JOSEPH MEETS HIS BROTHERS. 

Jacob's sons had never heard from their brother Joseph 
since they so cruelly sold him. They did not know where he 
was, nor what he was doing, and they never expected to see 
him again. They had sold him to be a slave, and did not 
know that God had made him a great man in Egypt. 

During the many }^ears that Joseph had been away from 
home, he had changed a great deal in his looks. He had also 
learned to speak the language used in Egypt, and so when his 



42 Jacob's sons in trouble. 

brothers came to buy corn, they did not know him, but sup- 
posed him to be some great man who had alwa} r s lived in that 
country. 

Joseph knew his brothers as soon as he saw them, but he 
did not want them to see that he did, so he talked roughly to 
them, and pretended to think them bad men, who had come to 
that country to make trouble. He also made them think that 
he could not understand their language, and had some one 
brought in to tell him what they said. 

Joseph was not at all angry with his brothers for the way 
they had treated him, neither did he want to do them harm, but 
he wished to see if they were better men now, and if they were 
really sorry for what the}' had done. 

Joseph talked with them for some time. They said they 
were true men, all the sons of one man. They told him that 
they had a younger brother at home, and one brother was not ; 
that is, they did not know where he was. 

Joseph knew they meant him, but he kept still, and let them 
talk. They tried hard to make him believe that they were 
good men, but still he pretended to think they were deceiving 
him, and so put them all in jail. 

Joseph kept his brothers three days. He then told them 
that if he could see their younger brother, he would believe their 
stoiy. One of them, he said, must stay in jail while the others 
went to bring him. He told them that they might take with 
them some corn, enough to last their families a little while ; 
but if they came the second time without their brother, he 
should know that they had no such brother, but were wicked 
men who had come there to do mischief. 



LESSON XXXIII. 

JACOB'S SONS IN TROUBLE. 
Jacob's sons were in great trouble, and they hardly knew 
what to do. They did not want to leave their brother in jail. 






Jacob's sons in trouble. 43 

and go back to their father with the bad news ; neither did they 
want to stay there as slaves, and let their friends at home die 
for want of food. 

They felt very sad, and said one to another that this trouble 
had come upon them because the} T had sold Joseph. Reuben, 
the brother who had tried to help Joseph, answered, "Did I 
not say to you, « Do not harm the child ' ? but you would not 
listen." All this was said before Joseph, not knowing that he 
could understand their language ; and when he heard them, he 
turned away, and wept. Afterward he came back, and talked 
with them a while longer, and then he took Simeon and bound 
him before their eyes, and had him taken back to the jail. 

Joseph told his servant to fill the men's sacks with corn, 
and to put the money they had paid for the corn in the sacks 
too. He then gave them food for their journey, and sent them 
away. 

On the way home, the brothers opened their sacks to get 
some corn, and there on the top they found the money. They 
could not think how it came there, and felt much worried about 
the matter. They were afraid that the great man in Egypt 
would think they had stolen it. 

When they came to their father, they told him all that 
had happened to them and Simeon. They also told him that 
unless Benjamin went back with them, they could trade no more 
in Egypt, and could buy no more corn. Jacob felt much 
troubled when he heard this. He said that Joseph and Simeon 
were gone, and now they wanted to take Benjamin awa}\ At 
last he told them that Benjamin could not go. 

By and by the corn they had bought was all gone, and Jacob 
asked his sons to go again, and buy more. They told their 
father that it would do no good to go to Egypt again, unless 
Benjamin went with them. They said the man there had told 
them plainly that they could have no more corn unless he could 
see their younger brother. 



44 BENJAMIN GOES TO EGYPT. 

Jacob thought his sons had done wrong in letting the man 
know that the}* had another brother ; but they told their father 
that the man asked them if they had another brother, and they 
had to tell him. 

At last one of the sons, named Judah, promised his father 
that he would see that Benjamin came back all right. He said 
that if any harm came to him, he would bear the blame forever. 

Finally Jacob said that if it must be so, Benjamin might 
go. He told his sons to take a present for the man, and the 
money they had found in their sacks, and go ; and said he, 
" May God be with you, and bring you back, with your other 
brother and Benjamin." 



LESSON XXXIV. 

BENJAMIN GOES TO EGYPT. 

Joseph often thought of his brothers while they were at 
home, and wondered why they stayed away so long. He was 
anxious to have them come back, for he wanted to hear from 
his father, and "to see his brother Benjamin. 

At last he saw them coming, and Benjamin with them. He 
told his servants to take them to his house, and make a nice 
dinner, for they would eat with him at noon. "When the broth- 
ers found themselves in Joseph's own house, they were afraid. 
They feared that they were going to be shut up there, and kept 
as slaves, because of the money in their sacks. They told the 
servant that the} r had found the money in their sacks, but did 
not know how it came there, and that they had brought it back 
with them. 

The servant saw that they were troubled, so he told them not 
to be afraid, and treated them very kindly, giving them water 
to wash their feet. He then brought out Simeon from the jail, 
and they were so glad to see him that they almost forgot their 
troubles. 



FINDING THE SILVER CUP. 45 

They heard that they were to eat dinner with Joseph, so they 
made ready their present to give him when he came home. At 
noon Joseph came, and they gave him the present, at the same 
time bowing themselves to the ground. He seemed pleased 
to see them, and asked them if they were well, and if their 
father was well. He then noticed Benjamin, and asked them 
if he was the younger brother of whom they had told him. 

Joseph spoke to Benjamin very kindly, and then he hurried 
away to his own room, where he could weep alone, for he could 
hide his feelings no longer. After a time he washed his face 
to hide all sign of tears, and came down to dinner. 

At the table Joseph seated his brothers according to their 
ages. They noticed this, and thought it strange that he 
should know how old they were. Joseph did not eat at the same 
table with his brothers, but he sent them their food, and when 
he passed Benjamin his plate, gave him five times as much as 
the others. 

Joseph's brothers stayed with him all night, and early the 
next morning, he sent them away with as much food as they 
could carry. 

Joseph had told his servant to put each man's money in 
his sack, and also to put his own silver cup in Benjamin's 
sack. The brothers knew nothing about this, so they started 
for home, thinking that their troubles were over. 



LESSON XXXV. 

FINDING THE SILVER CUP. 

Joseph sent his brothers away, but he did not intend to let 
them go very far. He wanted to try them still more, and see 
what kind of men they were. Not long after they had left the 
city, and before they had gone far away, Joseph told his serv- 
ant to follow after the men, and ask them why they had taken 
his silver cup. 



46 JOSEPH MAKES HIMSELF KNOWN. 

The servant did as his master said ; and when he overtook 
the men, asked them why they had done evil for good, and had 
taken his master's cup. 

The brothers were much surprised. They told the servant 
that they would not do such a wicked thing as to steal from 
his master's house. They said they had brought back the 
money they had found in their sacks, and that ought to show 
that they were honest men. 

They all knew that they had not taken the cup, so they told 
the servant that if he could find it, the one who had it should 
die, and all the others would be his master's servants. The 
man said he would not ask that, but would take for servant 
the one only who had the cup. 

They then began to search their sacks, and when they came 
to Benjamin's sack, they found the cup. This seemed to them 
the greatest trouble of all. They did not know how the cup 
came there, but they felt that Glod had something to do with it. 

They all went back to the city ; and when they came to 
Joseph, they fell before him on the ground. They did not try to 
show that they were honest men. Judah told Joseph that they 
did not know what to say, or how to clear themselves. He said 
that God had found out their sin, and they were now his serv- 
ants. Probably Joseph knew what Judah meant when he said 
that God had found out their sin, but he said nothing. 

Joseph told the men that he would not keep them all for 
his servants, but only the one with whom the cup had been 
found. The others, he said, might go home. 



LESSON XXXVI. 

JOSEPH MAKES HIMSELF KNOWN. 

When Joseph's brothers heard that Benjamin must stay in 
Egypt, they were much troubled. They knew how their father 



JOSEPH MAKES HIMSELF KNOWN. 



47 



would feel, should he receive such bad news, and they felt that 
they could not go home unless Benjamin went with them. 

Judah remembered the promise he had made concerning his 
brother, so he came near to Joseph, and asked if he might 
speak with him a moment. He told Joseph again about their 
brother who went away and never came back. He said their 
father was now an old 
man, and if harm should 
come to Benjamin too, their 
father would surely die. 

He told Joseph of his 
promise to bring Benjamin 
back home, and then he 
asked that he might stay 
in Benjamin's place, "for," 
said he, " how can I go back 
without the lad, and see the 
evil that will come upon 
my father ? " 

After hearing Judah 
talk in this way, Joseph 
could hide his feelings no 
longer. He had every one 
leave the room, except his 
brothers, and then he told them who he was. He wept 
aloud, so that the people outside heard him. He said, "I 
am Joseph ; is my father yet alive ? " but his brothers were 
so astonished and afraid that they could not answer him a 
word. Joseph told them not to be afraid, but to come near. 
He said they must not be angry with themselves for selling 
him, for it was God who had sent him to Egypt. 

Joseph told his brothers to hurry home, and bring back 
with them their father and their families, and he would care for 
them ; for the famine was yet to last five years. He then put his 




JOSEPH MAKES HIMSELF KNOWN. 



48 JACOB MEETS JOSEPH. 

arms around Benjamin's neck, and kissed him, and they both 
wept. Afterward he kissed all his brothers. 

When King Pharaoh and his servants heard that Joseph's 
brothers had come, they were much pleased. Pharaoh told 
Joseph to give wagons to his brothers that they might bring 
their father and families to Egypt. He said they need not bring 
their goods, for he would give them the best in the land. 

Joseph did as Pharaoh said. He also gave each of his 
brothers a change of clothing, but to Benjamin he gave five 
changes of clothing, and three hundred pieces of silver. He 
then gave them enough food to last until they came back, and 
sent them away. 

LESSON XXXVII. 
JACOB MEETS JOSEPH. 

Jacob was very anxious about his sons while they were 
gone. He was afraid that some new trouble would come upon 
them. Mah} T times a da} r he would look out over the fields to 
see if they were coming, and no doubt he often prayed that 
God would bring them safety home. 

At last he saw them coming, and Benjamin and Simeon 
with them. When they met their father, they told him at once 
the glad news that Joseph was still alive, and had become the 
great man of Egypt. 

Jacob could not believe his sons at first; but when he 
heard that Joseph had sent for him, and saw the wagons that 
were to carry him to Egypt, he said, "It is enough; Joseph 
my son is yet alive ; I will go and see him before I die." 

Jacob was very old, and Egypt was a long way off; but 
God came to him in a dream, and told him not to be afraid to 
go to Egypt, for he should surely see Joseph. 

When Joseph heard that his father was coming, he had 
his carriage made ready, and went out to meet him. When he 



DEATH OF JOSEPH. 49 

came to his father, he got down from his carriage, and putting 
his arms around his father's neck, wept a good while. Jacob 
said he was now willing to die, since he had seen Joseph alive. 

Joseph cared for his father and brothers, as he had said he 
would do. He gave them the best land in Egypt for their 
home ; and there they dwelt, and tended their flocks. 

Jacob lived after he came to Egypt seventeen years. 
When he died, he was almost a hundred and fifty years old. 
Joseph felt very sad when his father came to die. He fell upon 
his face, and wept upon him, and kissed him. All the people 
of Egypt mourned for Jacob. 

Jacob had told his children where he wished to be buried, 
and they did as he had asked them. The} T took him back to 
his old home, and buried him in the same cave with Abraham 
and Isaac. All the king's servants aud the great men of 
Egypt went with them. It was a very long procession, and it 
must have taken many days to go. 



LESSON XXXVIII. 

DEATH OF JOSEPH. 

Jacob's sons could hardly believe that their brother Joseph 
had no hard feelings toward them. They seemed to think that 
he treated them kindly only for the sake of their father. After 
his death they began to feel very uneasy. They were afraid 
that Joseph would in some way punish them for the evil they 
had done him so long before. 

After they came back from burying their father, they sent 
to Joseph, and asked his forgiveness for the way the}' had 
treated him. They also went to him, and bowing down before 
him, said they were all his servants. 

It hurt Joseph's feelings to have his brothers think that he 
would do them harm, and he wept while the}' talked with him. 
He told them not to be afraid. He said the} T had meant to do 



50 THE CHILD MOSES. 

him evil, but G-od had brought good out of it, and now they 
must not fear. He said he would still care for them and their 
little ones ; and so he spoke kindly to them and comforted 
them. 

Jacob was sometimes called Israel, and so his children after 
him were called the children of Israel, or the Israelites. They 
praj-ed to the true G-od, the one who made the earth and 
everything upon it. The other people living in Egypt did not 
care anything about the true G-od. They had many gods, such 
as the sun, the river, cats, different kinds of bugs, etc., and 
the}* really thought their gods could help them and keep them 
from danger. 

Although living among such wicked people, Joseph always 
tried to do right, and so G-od cared for him. He did not live 
as many years as his father, but still he became quite an old 
man, being one hundred and ten years old when he died. 

Before his death, he told the Israelites that G-od would 
sometime take them back to their own land, and he made 
them promise to take his bones with them when they went. 

Joseph was not buried in the ground, as people are now. 
He was put in a coffin, and laid away in a cave, or tomb. All 
dead people were cared for in the same way in that country. 
The bodies were prepared in such a way that thej 7 could be 
kept for hundreds of years. 



LESSON XXXIX. 

THE CHILD MOSES. 

After Joseph died, the people of Egypt had a wicked king 
named Pharaoh. He was not the same Pharaoh who lived 
when Joseph did, but another man by the same name. 

This king made slaves of the children of Israel, and they 
had to work very hard. He was also cruel to them, and sent 



THE CHILD MOSES. 51 

men to scold and beat them if they stopped to rest, or did not 
get just so much work done. 

At this time there were a great many of the children of 
Israel in Egypt, — so many that Pharaoh began to feel uneasy 
about it. He knew that he had not treated them well, and he 
was afraid that sometime the}" might join his enemies, and 
fight against him. 

The men of course were the ones he feared, so he began to 
think of some way to get rid of them. He did not want to 
destroy those then living, for they were his slaves, and did 
his work. The best wa} T , he thought, would be to kill the 
little boys. If this were done for a time, he knew that the 
men would soon become fewer, and he would have no need to 
fear them. 

Pharaoh thought his plan a very good one, so he sent to 
the Israelites, and told them that they must throw all their 
baby boys into the river. 

Now about this time a little boy was born who was after- 
ward named Moses. He was a very nice child, and his parents 
loved him dearly. They thought that he would some day 
become a wise and good man, if he could only live ; so they 
determined to save him, if possible. For three months they 
kept him hidden in the house. Then, fearing that some one 
would find him there, they thought it best to take him to a 
safer hiding place. The river was not far away, and the 
mother made a little boat, or ark, of rushes, and daubing it 
over with pitch so that it would not leak, put little Moses into 
it, and hid him among the flags by the river. He was too 
young to be afraid, and no doubt he was just as good and 
quiet as he would have been in his little cradle at home. His 
mother did not dare to stay with him, but she felt that God 
would care for him, and keep him. 

She was very anxious to know what would become of him, 
so she had his little sister Miriam stand at a distance to 
watch him. 



52 



FINDING MOSES. 



LESSON XL. 



FINDING MOSES. 

Little Moses seemed to have a very safe hiding place, but 
he was found after all. It came about in this way : One day 

the king's daugh- 
ter, with her serv- 
ant girls, came 
down to the river 
to bathe. While 
walking along the 
bank, she hap- 
pened to see the 
little boat hidden 
among the flags, 
and she sent one 
of her servants to 
get it. Uncover- 
ing the boat, she 
found the baby 
inside. Of course 
she was much sur- 
prised to find alit- 
tle child left alone 
in that way, but 
she guessed at 
once why he had 
been placed there. She said he must be one of the Israel- 
ites' children. Little Moses began to cry as soon as he was 
uncovered, and he looked so pitiful that the lady felt sorry for 
him. She saw, too, that he was a beautiful child, so she 
decided to keep him, and call him her little boy. Moses' 
sister, who had been watching him from a distance, saw that 
the lady was going to carry her brother away, so she came up 




FINDING MOSES. 



MOSES WITH THE KING S DAUGHTER. 53 

and asked if she should not go and get a nurse for the baby. 
When told that she might, she ran home and brought her 
mother. The king's daughter did not know that the woman 
was the child's mother, so she told her to take him home and 
care for him, and she should be paid for it. 

How pleasant this was for Moses and his parents ! He 
could be at home with his own mother to care for him, and 
she could have her baby with her without fearing all the time 
that somebody would come and kill him. Besides this she 
was paid for taking care of him. 

Do you think all this just happened to come about ? or did 
God have a care for little Moses, and take him back to his 
home ? In the picture, 3'ou see the king's daughter looking at 
Moses in his little boat. Standing off behind a tree is his sister 
Miriam, who was left there to watch him. Some one else was 
watching him too, whom we cannot see in the picture. Who 
do you think it was ? 



LESSON XLI. 

MOSES WITH THE KING'S DAUGHTER. 

Moses' mother did not expect to keep her little boy with 
her long. She knew that the king's daughter claimed him as 
her child, and would sometime take him away to live with her. 

Now King Pharaoh, and his daughter, and all the great 
people of Eg} 7 pt, cared nothing about the true Gcd. They did 
not pray to him, nor obey him.. Moses' mother knew this, and 
she did not want her little boy to do as they did, when he came 
to live with them. She wanted him to obey the true God, and 
become a good man. She felt that while he was with her, 
she must teach him all the good she could, so that he might do 
right, even if he had to live with wicked people. She spent 
much time telling him about God and heaven, and Moses was 
glad to listen. 



54 MOSES LEAVES EGYPT. 

Moses had kind parents and a loving sister. He had also 
a brother Aaron to join him in his play. Aaron was three 
years older than Moses, but he was not too old to be his play- 
mate, and the}' had manj r happy times together. 

When the time came for Moses to leave his home, he had 
grown to be quite a large boy. He loved his parents and his 
brother and sister very much, and no doubt he felt greatly 
grieved when he was taken from them. 

The new home to which Moses was taken, was very beauti- 
ful. It was the king's house, which was a grand place indeed. 

It was expected that Moses would be the king of Egypt 
sometime, so of course everj'thing was done to make him a 
great man. He had work to do and lessons to learn, the same 
as children have now ; and it must be that he did everything 
well, for he became very wise. 

Moses stayed with the king's daughter until he became a 
man. During all that time he tried to do right, and he feared 
the true God. He remembered what his mother had taught 
him, and this helped him to become a good man. 



LESSON XLIL 

MOSES LEAVES EGYPT. 

During the many years that Moses lived with the king, the 
Israelites were having a hard time. Pharaoh still treated 
them most cruelly. Moses saw this, and he felt sorry for 
his people. He was anxious to help them, and in some way 
make their lives happier. 

King Pharaoh heard how Moses felt toward the Israelites, 
and that he was taking their part, and he was much displeased. 
He was afraid that Moses would help his slaves to get away, 
so he threatened to kill him. Because of this, Moses had to 
leave Egypt, and flee to another country. At this time he was 
forty years old. 



GOD SENDS MOSES TO EGYPT. 55 

Moses went out of Egypt alone and on foot. He knew 
that be could no longer live in a grand house and have every- 
thing pleasant around him, neither could he ever expect to be 
king of Egypt; but Moses did not care about those things; he 
wanted to be one of God's people, and to help them all he could. 

After traveling many days, Moses at last came to a well, 
and there he sat down. While he was resting, some girls 
came to water their father's flocks. The shepherds who soon 
followed, were going to drive the young women away, but 
Moses helped them, and watered their flocks for them. 

The girls went home and told their father how the shepherds 
had treated them at the well, and that a man from Egypt had 
watered their flocks for them. The father asked his daughters 
where the man was, and why the}?- had left him. He told them 
to go and call him, that he might come in and eat. 

Jethro, for that was the man's name, liked Moses very 
much, and he hired him to tend his sheep. Moses worked for 
Jethro many years, and after a time married one of his daugh- 
ters. 

One day, as Moses was out tending the flocks, near a mount- 
ain, he saw a bush on fire. The bush was all in flames, but 
still it did not burn up. Moses thought this very strange, and 
he went nearer to look at it more closely. All at once a voice 
came from the bush, saying, " Moses, Moses." Moses answered, 
" Here am I." Then the same voice told him to come no nearer, 
but to take off his shoes from his feet, for the place where he 
stood was holy, and it was God who was talking to him. Moses 
then hid his face, for he was afraid to see God. 



LESSON XLIII. 

GOD SENDS MOSES TO EGYPT. 

When Moses found that it was God speaking to him from 
the burning bush, he was afraid. Taking off his shoes, he 



56 



GOD SENDS MOSES TO EGYPT. 



knelt before the bush, and covering his face, waited to hear 
what more the Lord might sa} T to him. 

God first told Moses who he was, and then he began to 
talk about his people, the children of Israel. He said that he 
had heard their cry, and knew all their troubles, and that now 
he had come down to help them. He said .he was going to 

lead them out 
of Egypt to a 
better country, 
where they 
would no 
longer be serv- 
ants to wicked 
people. 

Grod then 
told Moses 
that he had 
chosen him to 
go back to 
Egypt and do 
this work for 
him. Moses 
was not as 
anxious to help his people as he had been years before, and 
he did not want to do as the Lord said. He made several 
excuses about the matter. One was that the Israelites would 
not believe that Grod had sent him to help them. 

God then asked Moses what he had in his hand. He 
answered, " A rod." Grod told him to throw the rod upon the 
ground. He did so, and it became a serpent, and Moses fled 
from it. Grod then told Moses to reach out his hand and take 
the serpent by the tail. When he did so, the serpent became 
a rod again. The Lord then told Moses to put his hand in 
his bosom ; and when he took out his hand, it was leprous. 




MOSES AT THE BURNING BUSH. 



MOSES AND AARON BEFORE PHARAOH. 57 

Afterward he put his hand into his bosom again ; and when 
he took it out, it was as well as the other. 

God told Moses that he would help him to do these same 
wonderful things before the Israelites. If they did not then 
believe, G-od said that Moses should take water from the river, 
and pour it upon the ground, and the water would become 
blood. After all that the Lord had said to Moses, still he did 
not want to go. He said that he could not talk well, and had 
a slow tongue. 

G-od was displeased with Moses for making all these ex- 
cuses. He had told him that he would go with him and help 
him, and he wanted Moses to believe him. At last God told 
Moses that he would send his brother Aaron with him to speak 
for him. He also told him that all the men in Eg} r pt who 
had tried to kill him were dead, so Moses had no more to say. 
He went to Jethro and asked him if he might go back to 
Egypt to see his people. Jethro told him to go, so Moses 
took his rod in his hand and started back to his own country. 



LESSON XLIV. 

MOSES AND AARON BEFORE PHARAOH. 

On his way to Egypt, Moses was joined by Aaron, whom 
the Lord had sent to meet him. Aaron was very glad to see 
his brother, and seemed willing to help him in any way that 
he could. 

When Moses and Aaron reached Egypt, the first thing they 
did was to gather together the chief men of the Israelites, and 
tell them what God was going to do for his people. They 
also showed them the wonderful signs which God had given 
them ; and when the people saw these things, they believed. 
They were very glad to know that God cared for them and 
pitied them; and when they heard what great things he was 
going to do for them, they bowed their heads and worshiped. 



58 GOD TROUBLES PHARAOH. 

After talking with the children of Israel, Moses and Aaron 
went before the king. This king was called Pharaoh, but 
he was not the Pharaoh who had tried to kill Moses. That 
king was dead, and this was another who had taken his place. 
Moses and Aaron told the king that the Lord Grod of the 
Israelites had sent him word, saying, " Let my people go, that 
they may worship me in the wilderness." Pharaoh answered, 
" Who is the Lord ? I know not the Lord, neither will I let 
the people go." He became very angry with Moses and 
Aaron, and asked them why they had come there to trouble 
him. He said the people of Israel were idle and laz3 T , and 
that was why they wanted to go to the wilderness. He would 
not let them go away to stay even three days. After this, 
Pharaoh made the Israelites work harder than ever, and he 
set masters over them, who beat them and misused them. 

The people were sorry that Moses had said anything about 
their going away. They told him that instead of helping 
them, he had made their troubles greater. Moses was grieved 
when he saw how the people felt toward him, and he went 
to the Lord and told him about it. Moses seemed almost 
angry with God, and blamed him for all the trouble. He 
thought G-od ought to lead his people out of Egypt right 
away, and not let them stay there and suffer. 

Grod told Moses that he would sometime take his people 
from that country, but first, he was going to do great wonders 
in Egypt to show the wicked people there that he was the 
only true Gk>d. 

Moses told the children of Israel what the Lord had said, 
but they were in such distress that they would not listen to him. 



LESSON XLV. 
GOD TROUBLES PHARAOH. 
Grod again came to Moses. He told him to go to Pharaoh 
and ask hi in a second time to let the Israelites go into the 



GOD TROUBLES PHARAOH. 59 

wilderness to worship. Moses did not want to ask again, but 
God told him to go, and to speak only those words that he 
should tell him to speak. 

Moses and Aaron then went before the king, and gave him 
the word God had sent. Pharaoh's servants were with him at 
the time. Aaron took his rod and threw it on the ground 
before them, as God had told him to do, and it became a 
serpent. Pharaoh then sent for his wise men, and had them 
throw their rods upon the ground. Their rods became serpents 
too, but Aaron's rod swallowed up theirs. Pharaoh did not 
see but that his gods could do as great things as the God of 
the Israelites, so he would not obey the Lord, nor let the peo- 
ple go. 

God then told Moses to go and stand on the bank of the 
river in the morning, and when Pharaoh came to the river, 
to strike the water with his rod, and it should become blood. 

Moses and Aaron did as the Lord had said, in the sight 
of Pharaoh and his servants. The water became blood, and 
all the fish in the river died. Not only the water in the river 
was turned to blood, but all in the ponds and lakes, and even 
that which had been put in pails and earthen vessels. There 
was no water for the people to drink, and they had to dig new 
wells. The wise men could turn water into blood too, or at 
least they could make it look like blood ; and so the king 
would not listen to the Lord. 

God then sent Moses to the king again, to tell him that if 
he did not let the people go, he would send frogs upon the 
land. Pharaoh paid no attention to what Moses said, and so 
the frogs came. There were so many of them that they got 
into the houses and beds and ovens, and even into the bowls 
where the people kneaded their bread. 

The wise men brought frogs also, but they could not send 
them away. Pharaoh at last sent for Moses, promising to let 
the Israelites go, if their God would only take the frogs away. 



60 THE PLAGUES OF LICE AND FLIES. 

Moses prayed to God, and the frogs died, and were gathered 
together in great heaps. But as soon as the frogs were gone, 
Pharaoh forgot his promise. 



LESSON XLVI. 

THE PLAGUES OF LICE AND FLIES. 

The different troubles that God sent upon Pharaoh and his 
people, are called plagues. We sometimes hear of plagues 
nowadays, but they are not like those that came upon Eg3~pt. 
They were sent by God,' and were brought upon those wicked 
people to show them that there was a God greater than their 
gods, and that he was the one they must obey. 

The next trouble that God sent upon the people of Egypt 
was the plague of lice. All the dust in the land became lice, 
and they were on both people and beasts. The wise men tried 
to show that their gods could bring lice too, but they were 
not able to do so. They then went to the king, and told him 
that it must surely be a great God who could do such wonder- 
ful things ; but the king would not hear them. 

Early the next morning Moses went to Pharaoh, and told 
him that if he did not let the people go, God would send 
swarms of flies upon the land. The flies came, as Moses had 
said, only in that part of the country where the Israelites 
lived, there were no flies. With these troublesome things, 
came also different kinds of bugs and bees. The houses of 
the Egyptians were filled with them, and no doubt the people 
and animals suffered greatly because of their bites and stings. 

At last Pharaoh sent for Moses and Aaron, and told them 
that the Israelites might go and worship their God, only the} 7 
must not go far away. 

Moses then prayed to have the flies taken away, and God 
answered his prayer ; but as soon as the flies were gone, Pha- 
raoh refused to do as he had promised, and would not let the 
people go. 



OTHER PLAGUES. 61 

LESSON XL VI I. 

• OTHER PLAGUES. 

The fifth plague was a disease which G-od sent upon the 
cattle. The horses and sheep and many of the animals be- 
longing to Pharaoh and his people, died at this time. God had 
told Pharaoh that this plague should not come near the Israel- 
ites, so the king sent to see if any of their cattle were dead, 
and he found that not one had died. 

God next told Moses to take a handful of ashes, and 
sprinkle it toward heaven. He did so, and the Lord sent boils 
and sores upon both men and beasts. All the Egyptians were 
troubled with the boils, even the wise men. 

Although Pharaoh and his people suffered so much be- 
cause of these plagues, still he would not let the people go, and 
so God had to send still greater trouble upon him. Early the 
next morning Moses went to the king, and told him that if he 
did not let the Israelites go, God would send upon the land of 
Egypt a very great hailstorm, — such a storm as had never 
been seen before. Moses said the storm would be sent the 
next day, and that if any cattle or people were found out-of- 
doors at that time, they would surely ba killed. Some of the 
people believed what Moses said, and put their cattle under 
shelter ; but many paid no attention, and left their cattle in 
the field. 

When morning came, God told Moses to go out and stretch 
his rod toward heaven. Moses did so, and then the storm 
came. Great hailstones fell to the ground, and with the hail 
there were terrible thunderings, and fire ran along upon the 
ground. Trees were broken down, and nearly every living 
thing in the field was destroyed. During this fearful time, 
the Israelites were safe, and no hail fell where they were. 

Pharaoh was much frightened by this storm, and he sent 
for Moses and Aaron in great haste. He said he knew now 



62 LOCUSTS AND DARKNESS. 

that their G-od was good, and that he and his people were 
wicked. He asked Moses to pray for him that the storm might 
stop, "for," said he, "it is enough." He said the Israelites 
might go, and "he would keep them no longer. 

Moses did not believe the king would do as he promised, 
but he told him that he would pray for him. He then went out 
of the city, and raising his hands toward heaven, asked G-od 
to stop the storm. G-od heard Moses' prayer, but as soon as 
Pharaoh was over his fright, he was as hard-hearted as ever. 



LESSON XL VIII. 

LOCUSTS AND DARKNESS. 



After the hailstorm was over, Egypt was a very dreary- 
looking place indeed. It seemed to the people that their land 
was already destroyed, and so they told Pharaoh ; but still 
he would not let the Israelites go. 

The next trouble that Grod sent upon Egypt was the 
plague of locusts, or grasshoppers. Moses went to the king, 
and told him what would come, and when they would appear. 
The king did not at first pay much attention to the warning, 
but his servants did ; and they came to him, and urged him 
to let the people go. 

Pharaoh then sent for Moses, and told him that the men 
among his people might go, but that they must not take their 
families or their cattle. Moses answered the king, that if one 
went, all must go, and the cattle also. Pharaoh then drove 
Moses and Aaron out from before him, for he was very angry 
with them. 

That morning G-od sent a strong east wind. It blew all 
that day and all that night, and the next morning it brought 
the locusts. They were so many that the ground was covered, 
and the air was so filled with them that the sky was darkened. 



THE PASSOVER. 63 

They also went into the houses. Every green thing that the 
hail had left, they destroyed. 

After the locusts, God sent a terrible darkness upon Egypt. 
It was dark not only at night, but in the day-time also. This 
darkness lasted three da}'S and three nights, and during all 
that time the people never stirred out of their places, nor saw 
one another. The Bible sa}-s the darkness could be felt. 

During this time the Israelites had lights in their houses ; 
but for some reason the Egyptians could have no light, and 
so they had to sit in the darkness. How awful it must have 
been ! and how long the time must have seemed ! 

One would think that the king would have been willing 
to obey God after this, but he was not. He sent for Moses 
and told him that the people might go, biit they must leave 
their cattle. Moses would not hear to this, and Pharaoh be- 
came so angry that he told Moses to go away, and never come 
where he was again. He threatened to kill him if he ever 
saw his face again. 



LESSON XLIX. 
THE PASSOVER. 



God came to Moses, and told him to go to the king once 
more. Pharaoh had said that he would kill Moses if he ever 
saw him again, but Moses was not afraid to go. He knew 
that God would take care of him, so he went to the king with 
the word that God had sent. He told Pharaoh that at mid- 
night God would go through the land of Egypt, and kill the 
oldest child in every family, and also many cattle. The 
Israelites and their cattle, Moses said, should be safe, for their 
God would keep them. Moses then turned and went out. 

God afterward talked with Moses, telling him what the 
Israelites must do, and where they must be, during the night 
that he was to pass through Egypt to kill the oldest children 



64 THE LAST PLAGUE. 

of the Egyptians. He said that after this terrible plague, 
Pharaoh would send the Israelites out of his land, and they 
must all be ready to leave when the word should come for 
them to go. 

God commanded each famiry of the Israelites to take a 
lamb, and have it ready to kill the night of the plague. 
He told them to slay it in the evening, and to sprinkle its 
blood upon the side-posts and upper door-post of their houses. 
God said that when he should go through the land at mid- 
night, he would see the blood upon the door-posts, and pass 
those houses by, and no one inside should be harmed. The 
flesh of the lamb, God told them to roast, and eat with un- 
leavened bread and bitter herbs. 

When the evening of that awful night came, the Israelites 
did as God had commanded. Each family killed its lamb, and 
sprinkled the blood upon the door-posts. They then went into 
their houses, and shut the doors, and no one went out. They 
roasted the lamb, and ate it quickly with their staffs in their 
hands and their shoes on their feet, as God had told them to 
do. They did not sleep that night, but were all dressed ready 
for their journey when the king should tell them to go. 

In our next lesson we shall see what happened to Pharaoh 
and his people that night. This much you may know now : 
No one was hurt by the plague if he had the blood of the 
lamb sprinkled upon his door posts. God passed all those 
houses by, and no one inside was killed. 

Now how many of you can tell why this night was called 
the night of the passover ? 



LESSON L. 
THE LAST PLAGUE. 



While God's people were in their homes eating the pass- 
over lamb, man} 7 of the Egyptians, no doubt, were quietly 
sleeping. Some of the people may have feared the plague, and 



THE LAST PLAGUE. 65 

been awake, and watching. The king, however, did not seem 
to care anything about it. He was very proud and wicked, 
and seemed determined to have his own way, no matter what 
came. 

God had told Pharaoh when the plague would come, and 
at midnight it came. Then there was a fearful cry. Pharaoh, 
and his servants, and all the Egyptians arose to find in every 
house some one lying dead. Even into Pharaoh's home the 
plague had come. People were also found dead in prisons 
and jails, and many of the cattle were destroyed. 

Pharaoh was now truly frightened. He seat word to Moses 
and Aaron in great haste, and urged them to leave his land. 
He said the Israelites might go with them, and all their cattle 
and flocks. The Eg3 r ptians also went to the Israelites, and 
begged them to leave Egypt quickly. 

God's people were all ready to go when the king's word 
came. They asked the Egyptians to give them jewels of gold 
and silver, and clothing, and those wicked people willingly 
gave them all they asked, for they were so anxious to have 
them go. God told his people to ask for these things, and we 
shall see by and by why he did so. 

The children of Israel started on their journe}' in the night. 
They were on foot, and carried their clothing done up in bun- 
dles on their shoulders. 

The Israelites were very man} T . There were thousands of 
men, besides women and children. They also took with them 
many cattle. Grod went before his people in a cloud to show 
them the way. At night the cloud, or pillar, looked so bright 
that it was called a pillar of fire, and it gave light to the people: 
When the cloud stopped, the people rested ; and when it moved 
on, they followed. 

The people took with them out of Egypt the bod} T of 
Joseph. You remember that he made the Israelites promise 
to take his body with them when they should leave that land. 



66 



CROSSING THE RED SEA. 



LESSON LI. 




A CHARIOT. 



CROSSING THE RED SEA. 

The countiy to which G-od was leading his people was 
called Canaan. It was in this land that Abraham and Isaac 
had lived. It was also Jacob's old home, and the place where 
Joseph had lived before he was sold. 

The Israelites started out of Eg}^pt the night of the plague. 

They traveled sev- 
eral days, stopping 
at different places, 
and at last came to 
a sea called the Red 
Sea. Here the Lord 
told them to stop and 
rest. 

One evening as 
the}^ were there by 
the sea, they saw far behind in the distance a cloud of dust. 
As the}- watched the cloud, it came nearer and nearer, and 
soon the} r saw that it was a great army of men with their 
horses and chariots. The people were then much afraid. 
The} T knew that such a great company could be no other than 
Pharaoh and the Egyptians, and so it was. After thinking 
the matter over, Pharaoh was sorry that he had let the Israel- 
ites go, and he was coming to take them back. 

The Israelites saw no way to flee. The sea was before them, 
high mountains on each side, and Pharaoh close behind. At 
first they seemed to forget that God was leading them, and 
they began to complain and find fault with Moses. They said 
it would have been better if they had stayed in Egypt, for he 
had brought them out there to die. 

Moses then told the people to stand still, and see what God 
would do for them. The cloud which before had always gone 



CROSSING THE RED SEA. 



67 



in front of the people, turned and went behind them, so that 
it came between the Egyptians and the Israelites. To the 
Egyptians it looked dark, but to Grod's people it gave light 
as before. 

God then told Moses to stretch out his hand over the sea. 
He did so, and God rolled back the waters, leaving a broad, 
dry road through the sea. The people then walked through 
the midst of the sea on dry land, and the water stood up like 
high walls on each side. 

When Pharaoh and his army reached the shore the next 
morning, they were much surprised to find a road through the 
sea, and the Israelites nearly across on the other side. Pharaoh 
told his men to follow after, and they did so, with their horses 
and chariots. The Egyptians were not able to overtake the 
Israelites for Grod troubled them, and took off their chariot 
wheels. 

As soon as G-od's people were all safe on the other side, 
Moses stretched 
out his hand 
again over the 
sea, and the 
waters came to- 
gether upon the 
Egyptians, and 
all were drowned. 
Not one was 
saved alive, and 
their dead bodies 
were afterward 
washed up on the 
shore. 

The Israelites then sang a joyful song unto the Lord, and 
Miriam, Moses' sister, and the other women, played upon their 
instruments of music. 




CROSSING THE RED SEA. 



68 THE MANNA. 

LESSON L 1 1 . 

THE MANNA. 

After crossing the Keel Sea. the Israelites traveled three 
days before finding an}' water. At last they came to a place 
where there was water, hut it was bitter, arid they could not 
drink it. The people at once began to complain, and said to 
Moses. "What shall we drink?" God then showed Moses a 
tree, which, when put into the water, made it good, and fit 
for use. 

TThen the Israelites left Egypt, they took some food with 
them : but it was now nearly gone, and they were getting hun- 
gry. They found fault again, and said they wished they had 
stayed in Eg}-pt, where there was plenty to eat. They told 
Moses that he had brought them out there in the desert to kill 
them with hunger. 

The Lord heard what the people said, and he told Moses 
that he would give them food. So in the evening he sent 
quails, and the people caught them. In the morning they 
found the ground covered with little round, white things, 
which looked like small seeds. Moses told the people that 
this was bread which G-od had sent them from heaven. They 
called it manna. 

The manna fell every day except on the Sabbath, and it 
was gathered in the morning. On the day before the Sabbath, 
twice as much fell as at other times, and the people gathered 
enough for the next day. The manna would not keep over 
night onh' on the Sabbath. At other times it would spoil. 

God did not want the Israelites to do any work on the Sab- 
bath, and this is why he sent no manna on that day. 

If God wanted his people to be so careful about the Sab- 
bath in those days, don't you'think he wants us to be careful 



BRINGING WATER FROM THE ROCK. 69 

LESSON LITI. 

BRINGING WATER FROM THE ROCK. 

The people traveled on, and again the}^ could find no wa- 
ter. They complained as before, and said that Moses had 
brought them out of Eg}-pt to kill them, and their children, 
and their cattle, with thirst. 

Moses felt much troubled when he heard the people talking 
in this wicked way, and he cried to the Lord. God told him to 
go to a certain rock, and strike it with his rod, and water 
should come out. Moses did as God had said, and water came 
from the rock, and the people and cattle had enough. 

At this same place were living some wicked people who 
did not want the Israelites to go through their land. They 
came out, and fought against God's people, and tried to drive 
them back toward Egypt. While they were fighting, Moses 
and Aaron, and another man by the name of Hur, went up on 
a high hill, where the}^ could see all that was going on. 
Moses had his rod with him, and when he held it up toward 
heaven, the Israelites would gain in the fight, and when he let 
it down, they lost. Moses became very tired holding his hands 
up so long, so he sat down on a stone, and Aaron held up 
one of his hands and Hur the other until the sun went down. 
The battle was then over, and the wicked people were driven 
away. 

While the Israelites were at this place, Moses' wife and 
his two sons came to meet him. Moses was very glad to see 
his family, for he had been away from them a long time. He 
was also glad to see his wife's father, Jethro, who had come 
with them. 

It was not far from this place that God had talked with 
Moses out of the burning bush, for it was in this same county 
that Moses had lived forty years, and tended the flocks of 
Jethro. 



70 GOD ON MOUNT SINAI. 

LESSON LIV. 

GOD ON MOUNT SINAI. 

About three months after the Israelites left Egypt, the}'- 
camped near a mountain called Sinai. While there, Gk>d came 
down upon the mount, and talked with Moses. He told him 
that in three days he would come down on the mountain again, 
in sight of all the people, and would speak with them. He 
said he wanted them to be ready to meet him at that time. 
He also told Moses to let nothing come near the mountain 
during the next three days, for if any persons or beasts 
touched it during that time, they should surely be put to 
death. 

On the third day there were thunderings and lightnings, 
and a thick cloud upon Sinai. Smoke also covered the mount, 
and it trembled as if shaken by an earthquake. Grod could 
not be seen, for he was covered by the cloud, but the people 
knew he was there, and they were afraid. 

At this time Glod gave his people the ten commandments. 
Perhaps you already know what they are, but we will write 
them here in a short form so that you can learn to repeat 
them : — 

1. Thou shalt have no other gods before me. 

2. Thou shalt not bow down to any image. 

3. Thou shalt not take the name of the Lord in vain. 

4. Remember the Sabbath day to keep it holy. 

5. Honor thy father and thy mother. 

6. Thou shalt not kill. 

7. Thou shalt not commit adultery. 

8. Thou shalt not steal. 

9. Thou shalt not bear false witness against thy neighbor. 
10. Thou shalt not covet anything that is thy neighbor's. 

Moses had brought the people to the foot of the mountain ; 
but they were afraid, and did not want to stay any longer, so 
they went and stood afar off. Moses then went near the thick 



MOSES ON THE MOUNT. 



71 



cloud, and God told him what more to say to the people. 
Afterward Moses went to them with the word which God had 
sent, and they said they would obey the Lord, and do as he 
said in all things. 



LESSON LV. 

MOSES ON THE MOUNT. 

Again Moses was called up on Mount Sinai, where he 
stayed forty days and forty nights. While there, God told 
him about a taberna- 
cle, which he wanted 
the Israelites to make 
and carry with them. 
He gave Moses a pat- 
tern for it, telling him 
just how to make it, 
what to put in it, and 
how to carry it. God 
said that the taberna- 
cle should be his 
house, and there he 
would meet with 
Moses and talk with 
him. 

After telling 
Moses about the tab- 
ernacle, God gave 
him two blocks, or 
tables, of stone, on 
which he had written 
with his own finger 
the words that he had 
spoken to the people 
from the mount. hoses on mount sinai. 




72 THE TABERNACLE. 

This writing was called the law of God, and it was the ten 
commandments which we now have in the Bible. 

Moses was gone so long that the people thought he was 
never coming back. So they went to Aaron, and asked 
him to make them a god to go before them and lead them. 
Aaron was willing to please them, so he told them to bring 
their ear-rings and jewels of gold, and he made a golden calf. 
They said that this calf was the god that had brought them out 
of the land of Egypt. 

God knew what his people were doing, and he told Moses 
about it ; for he was still with him on the mount. Moses then 
came down from the mountain, taking in his arms the stones 
that God had given him. As he came near the Israelites, and 
saw them singing and dancing around the golden calf, he was 
so surprised and angiy that he threw the stones to the ground, 
and they were broken in pieces. 

Moses took the calf, and burned it in the fire ; and after- 
ward he ground it to powder, and putting it in water, made 
the people drink it. 

God caused many of the people to be killed that day 
because of their sin. Had it not been for the prayers of Moses, 
all would have died. 



LESSON LVI. 

THE TABERNACLE. 

God called Moses up on Mount Sinai again. This time he 
told him to bring with him two tables of stone like those he 
had broken. On these stones God wrote the same words that 
were on the others. Moses sta}*ed with the Lord forty days 
and forty nights again, and during all that time he neither ate 
nor drank. 

When Moses came down from the mount, his face shone so 
that the people were afraid of him, and he had to cover it 
with a vail while he talked with them. He told them about 



THE TABERNACLE. 73 

the tabernacle that God wanted them to make. They were 
much pleased with the idea of building God a house, and all 
were willing to do what they could. The women spun beauti- 
ful cloth, and gladly gave their jewels and gold and silver. 
-So much was brought, that finally Moses had to tell the peo- 
ple to bring no more ; for there was already too much. 

The tabernacle looked something like a tent. The sides 
were made of boards covered with gold. Over the top was a 
beautiful coA^ering made of ten separate curtains fastened to- 
gether with clasps of gold. These curtains were made of 
very nice cloth, and had pictures of angels worked on them. 
Over this covering were three others, two of them being the 
skins of animals. Probably they were put over the tabernacle 
to keep it dry. 

There were two rooms in the tabernacle. One was called 
the holy place ; the other, the most holy place. These rooms 
were separated by a curtain like the one over the top. This 
curtain was held up by posts, or pillars of wood, covered with 
gold. 

The door of the tabernacle opened into the holy place. 
Before this door hung a curtain like the one between the two 
rooms. 

In the holy place was a large candlestick made of solid 
gold. The candlestick held seven lamps, and they were kept 
burning night and day. In this same room were also a table 
and an altar ; both were covered with gold. Incense was 
burned on the altar every day. This incense was made of 
different spices mixed together ; and when burning, it filled 
the air with a sweet odor. 

In the most hoty place was a large box, or chest, called 
the ark. It was overlaid with gold, and on its cover were 
two angels of solid gold. The cover was called the mercy- 
seat. Above it rested a bright cloud, which showed that God 
was there. In the ark were the stones on which God wrote 
his lavv\ 



74 



THE PRIESTS. 



LESSON LVII. 



THE PRIESTS. 

Around the tabernacle was an open space, or yard, called 
;he court. This court was fenced in with curtains hung on 

brass pillars. 

In the court, before the 
tabernacle door, was an 
altar of brass. On this 
altar the offerings were 
made, and fire was kept 
burning upon it all the 
time. Near the altar stood 
a large brass bowl. It was 
called the laver, and water 
was kept in it for the use of 
the priests. 

On the next page, } t ou 
will find pictures of all these 
things. You. see that the 
altars, the table, and the ark 
had rings at their corners, 
and that poles pass through 
the rings. The persons 
chosen to carry this holy 
furniture were commanded 
not to touch it, and these 

THE HIGH-PRIEST. poleg were f 0j . them t() take 

hold of as they moved it about from place to place. 

God chose Aaron and his sons to do the work about the 
tabernacle. They burned the incense, and trimmed the lamps, 
and made the offerings. They also taught the people how to 




do right, and so they were called priests. 



When the priests 




THE TABLE OF SHEW-BREAD. 





THE GOLDEN CANDLESTICK. THE LAVEli. 



THE ALTAR OF INTENSE. 




THE ALTAR OF BURNT-OFFERING. 



THE QUAILS. 



75 



went into the tabernacle, they put on a dress different from 
that worn b} r the other people. The dress was made after the 
pattern that God gave Moses. Aaron was called the high- 
priest. His robe was much richer than the others, and around 
the bottom were little bells, which made a tinkling sound as he 
moved about. 

The tabernacle was so put together that it could be taken 
down, and carried from one place to another. The cloud that 
led the people rested above the tabernacle. When G-ocl wanted 
the people to move on, the cloud rose and went before them. 
AVhen they were to camp, it rested over the spot where the 
tabernacle was to be placed. 

The tents in which the people lived, were always pitched 
in order around the tabernacle. 



LESSON LVIII. 

THE QUAILS. 

After the tabernacle was finished, the Israelites left Sinai, 
and went on their wa}^. It was not long before they began to 







QUAILS, 



complain of their food. They were tired of the manna, and 
wanted meat to eat. They said they could have plenty of fish 
in Egypt, also cucumbers, and melons, and onions ; but now 



76 THE QUAILS. 

there was nothing before their eyes but the manna. The peo- 
ple even cried over the matter, and Moses heard them weeping 
in their tents. 

God was much displeased with his people for finding fault 
with the food he had sent them. He told Moses that he 
would now give the people flesh to eat until the} r could no 
longer bear the sight of it. There were a great many per- 
sons to be fed, and Moses wondered where the meat was to 
come from. He asked the Lord if all the cattle and flocks 
would have to be killed. The Lord answered that he was able 
to give the people flesh to eat ; and so he was. 

God caused a strong wind to blow, which brought great 
numbers of quails, and they flew so low that they could be 
caught easily. All that da}-, and all that night, and all the 
next day, the people stood up to gather the birds. Those 
that caught least had man}- bushels. 

God had to punish the Israelites for their wickedness and 
fault-finding ; so while the}*- were eating the flesh, he let it 
make them very sick, and many of the people died. It then 
came to pass as the Lord had said ; they disliked the flesh, 
neither did the}- want it in their sight. 

Soon after this, Aaron and Miriam became jealous of 
Moses, and said some very wicked things about him. G-od 
heard them, and he sent a terrible disease upon Miriam. 
Moses then prayed for his sister, and the Lord healed her, 
but she had to be shut out of the camp seven da}-s. 

We see that long ago when people found fault with what 
God gave them, and said hateful things about one another, 
God was displeased, and punished them. If such things were 
wrong then, don't you think they are just as wrong now? 
Let us bJ careful, then, not to fret and complain as those peo- 
ple did. Neither let us speak unkindly of others ; but let us 
do as Moses did, and pray for those who speak against us. 



THE SPIES. 



77 



LESSON LIX. 



THE SPIES. 

The Israelites at last reached Canaan, the country which 
God was to give them. They had now been traveling more 
than a year, and they were glad indeed to be so near their 
home. 

The people then living in Canaan were very wicked. They 
would not obey the true (rod, so the Lord told the Israelites 
to drive them out, 
and take their land. 

Before entering 
Canaan, Moses sent 
twelve men to look 
through the land, 
and see what kind 
of place it was, 
and what sort of 
people lived there. 
These men were 
called spies. They 
were gone forty 
days. When they 
came back, they brought some of the fruit of the land, and a 
cluster of grapes so large that two men carried it. 

The spies said Canaan was a very good land, but the peo- 
ple there were giants, and the cities had very high walls. 
Two of the spies, Caleb and Joshua, said that the Israelites 
were well able to take the land, even if the people were giants 
and their cities walled ; " for," said they, " the Lord will help 
us." But the other spies said, " We cannot do it ; for we are 
as grasshoppers in the sight of the people over there, and 
their cities are walled up to heaven." Caleb and Joshua 




THE RETURN OF THE SPIES. 



78 MANY ISRAELITES DESTROYED. 

"orged the people to go, but they would not listen, and they 
became so angry with these good men that they were ready to 
stone them. 

The Israelites were very sure that they could not enter 
Canaan ; so all that night they cried and complained against 
Moses and Aaron for bringing them out of Egypt. They 
even talked about choosing some one to lead them back to 
that country. 

When God saw how the people felt, he was yen* angry, and 
he told Moses that he would destroy them all. Moses then 
prayed for the people, and for his sake the Lord saved them. 
God told them, however, that the}* should never enter Canaan. 
He said that their children should go into that good land, 
and with them Caleb and Joshua, but the rest should wander 
about in the wilderness and die there. 



LESSON LX. 
MANY ISRAELITES DESTROYED. 

When it was told the Israelites that they should never 
enter Canaan, they were very sad. The}* saw that they had 
made a great mistake in not listening to Caleb and Joshua ; 
so the}* rose early in the morning, and told Moses that they 
would go in and take the land as God had commanded. 
Moses urged the people not to go ; " for," said he, " the Lord is 
not with you, and you will be killed by the people of the 
land." But the Israelites would not listen, and that day they 
tried to enter Canaan. As soon as the people of that country 
saw them, they came out and fought against them. The 
Israelites were driven back and many of them killed, as 
Moses had said they would be. They then saw that they could 
never take Canaan unless the Lord was with them ; so they 
turned, and went back into the desert. 

Although the Lord had to punish his people for their 



AARON'S ROD. 79 

wickedness, he still loved them. He did not leave them, but 
led them as before. One would think that they would have 
obeyed God better after this, but they did not. It was not 
long before they began to talk against Aaron. God had 
chosen Aaron to be priest, but some of the other men wanted 
to be priests too. They said that the Lord had chosen them 
as well as Aaron, and that he was no better than the}". 

Moses heard what these men said, so he told them to come 
to the door of the tabernacle with Aaron, and the Lord would 
show them who was hoi}*, and who was to be priest. The 
next day the men came, and all the people with them. God 
then told Moses and Aaron to stand away from the people, 
and he would destroy them in a moment. Moses and Aaron 
fell upon their faces, and pleaded with God to save his peo- 
ple. God told Moses to separate the people from the men 
who had been talking so wickedly. Moses did so, and the 
men were left alone in their tents, with their wives and chil- 
dren. The earth then opened, and swallowed them up, with 
their families, their tents, and everything that belonged to 
them. The Lord also sent fire, which burned up two hundred 
and fifty people who had joined in with these wicked men. 

The people were much frightened when they saw what 
the Lord had done. The very next da}*, however, they be- 
gan to talk against Moses and Aaron again, accusing them 
of killing the people of the Lord. God then sent a plague 
upon them, and many thousands died. 



LESSON LXI. 
AARON'S ROD, 



The Israelites knew that Aaron had been chosen for priest, 
but they still found fault with him. They said so many hate- 
ful things that God thought it best to give them one more sign 
to show that he had chosen Aaron. 



80 AARON'S ROD. 

He told Moses to take twelve rods, and lay them in the 
tabernacle before the ark. Aaron's name was written upon 
one rod, and upon the others were the names of other persons. 
The next day, when Moses went into the tabernacle, he 
found that Aaron's rod had budded and blossomed, and 
there were almonds on it. The other rods had not changed. 
Moses took the rods out to the people, and all saw that God 
had done this strange thing to show that he had chosen Aaron 
for priest. Aaron's rod was taken back to the tabernacle, and 
kept there before the ark. 

After this the people traveled on, and pitched in another 
part of the desert. Here Miriam died, and was buried. At 
this place there was no water, and the people began to com- 
plain again. They said God had led them to a country where 
there were no vines, nor figs, nor any water, and they wished 
themselves dead. 

Moses and Aaron went to the tabernacle to talk with God, 
and see what to do. God told them to gather the people to- 
gether at a certain rock, and then speak to the rock, and it 
should send out water. Moses did as God had said, but when 
he came to the rock, he was out of patience with the people, 
and he did not speak as he should. He said, " Hear now, ye 
rebels; must we fetch } T ou water out of this rock?" Moses 
then smote the rock twice with his rod before the water would 
come. 

Moses was rather angry, and he spoke as though he and 
Aaron were the ones who were doing this wonderful thing. 
God was displeased with them for this. He told them that 
because of their sin, they could not enter Canaan. How sad 
this was! No doubt they were much disappointed when God 
told them this, but they did not complain. They knew that 
God would not punish them more than they deserved. Both 
Aaron and Moses were very sorry for their wrong, and we 
never hear of their displeasing God again. 



DEATH OF AARON. 



81 



LESSON LXII. 



DEATH OF AARON. 

After G-od had sent water from the rock, the people moved 
on, and pitched near a mountain called Hor. While there, 
God came to 
Moses and Aaron, 
and said that the 
time had come for 
Aaron to die. He 
told them to take 
Eleazar, Aaron's 
son, and go up on 
the mountain ; for 
Aaron should die 
there. They did 
as the Lord had 
said, and went up 
on the mount in 
the sight of all 
the people. When 
they came to the 
top, Moses took 
off from Aaron his 
rich robe, and put 
it upon Eleazar, as 
God had com- 
manded. Aaron then died there on the mountain, and Moses 
and Eleazar came down alone. 

When the people saw that Aaron was really dead, the}' 
were very sorrowful indeed. The} T forgot their wicked feelings 
toward him, and they mourned for him man}" days. 

After the death of Aaron, the people went down by the 
Red Sea. There they began to complain of the manna again. 




THE BRAZEN SERPENT. 



82 BALAAM THE PROPHET. 

They said they could not bear the sight of it. To punish the 
people, Grod sent serpents among them, which bit them, and 
many of the people died. At last they came to Moses for 
help. They said they had done wrong, and they wanted him 
to pray that the serpents might be taken away. Moses then 
prayed for the people, and the Lord showed him what to do. 
He told him to make a serpent of brass, and put it up high 
on a pole. God said that all who were bitten, should be 
healed if they would look at it. Moses made the serpent, 
and all who looked at it were healed. 



LESSON LXIII. 
BALAAM THE PROPHET. 

After a time the Israelites pitched their tents in a country 
where some very wicked people lived. These people had heard 
of the Israelites, and when they saw so man}- tents in the val- 
ley near by, they were much frightened. The}- feared that the 
Israelites had come to drive them away and take their cities. 

In those days there were prophets. They were persons to 
whom G-cd gave visions and dreams. They could often tell 
what was to take place in the future, for God would make it 
known to them. 

Now at this time there lived a prophet named Balaam ; and 
when the king of the country saw the Israelites so near, he sent 
for him to come and curse them. 

When the king's servants came to Balaam, he told them to 
stay all night, and he would see what the Lord would say to 
him. G-od came to Balaam that night, and said, " Thou shalt 
not curse the people ; for they are blessed." In the morning i 
Balaam told the king's servants that he could not go with 
them ; so they went back without him. The king then sent 
other servants, and they promised Balaam that the king would 
give him rich presents and make him a great man if he would 



BALAAM BLESSES THE ISRAELITES. 83 

only come and curse the Israelites. Balaam told the men that 
he could not go unless the Lord gave him leave ; but he asked 
them to stay all night, and he would see if God had an}*thing 
more to say to him. 

God had once said "no " to Balaam, and that should- have 
been enough. But Balaam wanted to go ; he wished to be a 
great man. and have all the presents that the king would give 
him. God knew how Balaam felt, so that night he told him to 
go if the men called him, but to speak only those words that he 
should give him to speak. 

God was displeased with Balaam for asking the second 
time. When God says "no," he means no, and he does not 
like to have people tease him for their own way. The Lord 
knows what is best for us, and we should be willing to do 
just as he says. 

LESSON LXIV. 

BALAAM BLESSES THE ISRAELITES. 

The king's servants did not call Balaam ; but he was so 
anxious to go that the next morning he saddled his beast and 
followed after them. On the way an angel stood before him 
with a sword in his hand. Balaam could not see the angel, 
but his beast could, and she turned out of the road into a field. 
Balaam struck the beast to make her go back into the road. 
Going a little farther, he came to a place where there was a wall 
on both sides of the road. Here the angel stood in the way 
again, and the beast jumped to one side, and crushed Balaam's 
foot against the wall. Balaam then struck the beast a second 
time. He next came to a very narrow place where he could 
turn neither one way nor the other. Here the angel met 
him, and when the beast saw him, she fell to the ground. 
Balaam was then so angry with the beast that he hit her with 
his staff. 



84 MOSES TALKS WITH THE PEOPLE. 

After Balaam had struck the beast the third time, the Lord 
made her speak, and she said to Balaam, "What have I done 
that you should strike me these three times?" Balaam answered 
that he wished he had a sword so he could kill her. The Lord 
then opened the prophet's e} T es, and he saw the angel with a 
sword in his hand. Balaam then bowed his head, and fell on 
his face. 

The angel told Balaam that he would have been killed had 
not the beast turned aside. He told the prophet that he had 
been in the way to trouble him because he was not doing right. 
Balaam then said that he would go back, if he was displeasing 
the Lord ; but the angel told him to go on, and to speak only 
those words that the Lord should give him. 

Balaam went on his waj', and the king came out to meet 
him. The next day the king took him to a high place where 
he could see all the tents of the Israelites. Balaam then began 
to talk about them, and all he said was good. Three times the 
king had him try to curse God's people, but every time he 
blessed them. At last the king became very angry with 
Balaam, and told him to go home. He would not make him a 
great man, neither would he give him any of the presents which 
he had promised him. 

Balaam did not gain much by tiying to curse God's people. 
He displeased God, and also the king, and was as poor as 
ever. Finally he died in battle, fighting against God's people. 



LESSON LXV. 

MOSES TALKS WITH THE PEOPLE. 

After many 3-ears' wandering, God brought the Israelites 
near Canaan a second time. They had been in the desert now 
about forty years. During all this time, God had been very 
kind to them. He had led them on the wa} T , and given them 



DEATH OF MOSES. 85 

food to eat and water to drink. Their clothing and shoes had 
not become old, and no good thing was kept from them. 

Although God was so kind to his people, they did not 
always obey him. Often they murmured and complained, and 
wished themselves back in Eg} r pt. The}' also talked against 
Moses and Aaron, the men whom God had chosen to help them. 
All these things were very wrong in God's sight, and he had to 
punish his people, and destroy many of them because of their 
sins. It was on their account, too, that Moses and Aaron were 
led to sin, and so were shut out of Canaan. 

All the people had seen Aaron go up on Mount Hor to die. 
Now as they came near Canaan, Moses told them that he 
too must soon leave them. The people were very sorrowful 
when they heard this. Although they had talked against 
Moses many times, still they had learned to love him. 

God came to Moses, and told him what to say to the people 
before leaving them. So Moses gathered them together, and 
talked with them a long while. He first spoke of the wonder- 
ful things God had done for them since they had left Egypt. 
Then he told them how they must do when they should come 
into Canaan. He said they must be strong and of good cour- 
age, and fear not the wicked people of the land, but drive them 
out, as God had commanded. He also told them how to 
divide the land, and how to treat one another. He urged 
them to do right, and serve the Lord ; for then God would 
be with them. 



LESSON LXVL 

DEATH OF MOSES. 



After talking with the people, Moses called Joshua, and 
told him before them all, that God had chosen him to lead the 
Israelites into Canaan. Moses said to him, " Be strong and of 



86 SPIES SENT TO JERICHO. 

good courage, and fear not. The Lord will go with you, and 
will not leave you." Joshua, } t ou remember, was one of the 
good spies. 

At this time the Israelites were very close to Canaan. Near 
by was a mountain called Pisgah. God had told Moses to go 
up on this mount, and he would show him all the land of 
Canaan, and afterward he should die there. So as soon as 
Moses had finished talking with the people, he blessed them, 
and went up on the mount. Moses was a hundred and twenty 
years old at this time, but he did not seem old. He was strong 
and well, and his eyesight was as good as ever it was. All the 
people knew what was going to happen to Moses on the mount, 
for he had told them. How sad they must have felt when 
they saw him going from them ! 

Moses was a good man, so kind and patient. God loved 
him very much, and when he died, God himself buried him. 
Xo one could ever find his grave, but we learn by reading the 
Bible, that he is now alive and in heaven. Nearly all cf the 
people who have died, are in their graves asleep ; but Moses 
was so patient, and obeyed the Lord so well, that he was 
taken to heaven. By and by all good people will be taken to 
heaven where Moses is. Would 3*011 like to see him? Would 
you like to hear him tell about crossing the Bed Sea, and 
about bringing water from the rock ? If we are good, God 
will surely let us see him sometime. Then in our beautiful 
home above, we can hear him tell of all the wonderful things 
which God did for his people in the desert. 



LESSON LXVII. 

SPIES SENT TO JERICHO. 

After Moses died, God came to Joshua, and told him to 
take the Israelites into Canaan. He promised to go with him 
and help him. He said that he must not be afraid, but go in 



SPIES SENT TO JERICHO. 87 

and destroy the wieked people of the land, as Moses had com- 
manded. Joshua then told the people to cook victuals for the 
journey, for in three days they would enter Canaan. 

Before going into the land, Joshua sent two men into 
Canaan to a city called Jericho. He wanted them to look 
around, and find out all they could about the place, and bring 
him word. 

When the spies entered the city, they went to the house of 
a woman named Rahab to stay all night. The king of the city 
heard that there were some strangers at Rahab 's house, and he 
sent to have them brought out. The king mistrusted who 
the men were, and why they had come, and he wanted to kill 
them. 

Rahab did not send the men out, but hid them on the top 
of her house. She sent word to the king that the men went 
away about dark, and she did not know where they were. The 
king then sent his servants out of the city to search for them. 

Jericho had a very high wall around it. When night came, 
the gate of this wall was shut, and no one could go out or in 
until it was opened again in the morning. Rahab knew this. 
She knew, too, that if the strangers tried to pass out by daj'- 
light, they would be seen and probably killed. At last she* 
thought of a way to help them, and she went up on the roof to 
talk with them. 

She told the men that she knew who they were. She said 
that the people of the city were much afraid of the Israelites, 
because of the wonderful things their G-od had done for them. 
They had heard how he had made a path through the Red Sea, 
and had helped them in their battles. Rahab said she knew 
that their G-od was going to give them Canaan, and she wanted 
the men to promise that when they came to destroy Jericho, 
they would save her and her father's family because of the 
kindness she had shown them. 

Now Rahab was a wicked woman, and as we have seen, 



88 CROSSING THE JORDAN. 

was not afraid to tell wrong stories ; but she had tried to help 
God's people, so the men promised that if she would not make 
them known, they would do as she wished. The} r told her that 
when the Israelites came to destroy the city, she must hang out 
of her window a red cord so they could tell where she lived, 
and that her father and mother, and brothers, and sisters, must 
be in the house with her ; for none outside would be saved. 

Rahab's house was built close by the wall of the city, and 
that night she let the men down by a cord on the outside of the 
wall. She told them to hide in the mountains three days, for 
fear that the men who were looking for them might see them. 
The spies did as Rahab had said, and then went back to Joshua. 



LESSON LXVIII. 

CROSSING THE JORDAN. 

When the spies came to Joshua, they told him all that had 
happened to them in Jericho. They said that the people there 
were much afraid of the Israelites, and both spies felt sure 
that God was going to help in taking the cit}\ 

Joshua rose early the next morning, and told the people 
that when they saw the priests carrying the ark out of the 
camp / to follow them. 

Now just between the people and Canaan was a river called 
the Jordan. There was no bridge over the river, and at that 
time of the year the water was very high. The people no 
doubt wondered how they were going to cross ; but God was 
leading them, and he soon made a way. He told Joshua 
to send the priests ahead with the ark ; and as soon as their 
feet touched the water, he said it should roll back, and the 
people could go through on cliy ground. 

All came to pass as God had said it would, and the priests 
stood in the middle of the river with the ark until all the peo- 
ple had passed over. The priests afterward went out of the 



TAKING JERICHO. 89 

river, and as soon as they reached the other shore, the water 
flowed on as before. 

The Israelites could see that it was none other than G-od 
who had done this strange thing. They saw that he was with 
Joshua and was helping him, and from that time they feared 
and obeyed their new leader as they had obeyed Moses. 

The people were at last in Canaan, the country which G-od 
had promised them. They had no more need of the manna, 
and so it fell no longer. Some of it was kept, however, and 
set away in the tabernacle. The people now had plenty to eat, — 
corn, and fruits, and everything the}' wanted, for Canaan was a 
very rich country. 

How thankful the people must have been for this good 
land, after wandering so long in a desert country! How nice 
the fruit must have tasted, and the pure, cool water ! Do n't 
you think God was very good to his people ? Ought they not 
to have loved and obeyed him always ? Ought we to love him 
too ? Why ? 

LESSON LXIX. 
TAKING JERICHO. 

After crossing the Jordan, the Israelites encamped for a 
short time not far from Jericho. One day, as Joshua was 
walking out alone near the city, he met a man with a sword in 
his hand. Joshua said to him, " Art thou for us, or against 
us ? " The man answered that he was captain of the Lord's 
arm}'. Joshua then knew that he was talking with the Lord, 
and he fell on his face to the ground. The Lord told him to 
take off his shoes, for he was standing on holy ground. The 
same thing, you remember, was said to 3Ioses when the Lord 
talked with him from the burning bush. 

The people of Jericho had become so afraid of the Isra- 
elites that at this time they kept their gates shut night and 
day. No one was allowed to go in or out. God knew that 



90 achan's sin. 

his people could not get inside those walls alone, so he had 
come to Joshua to help him. He told him to have the peo- 
ple march around the city once every day for six da3's. He 
said they should take with them the ark, and seven priests 
should march before it, each blowing upon a horn, or trum- 
pet. On the seventh day the Lord said the people should go 
around the city seven times. After the last time around, the 
priests were to blow a long, loud blast upon their trumpets, 
and all the people were to give a great shout, and G-od said 
the walls of Jericho should fall. 

The Israelites did as G-od had commanded. Once every 
day they marched around the city, the priests blowing upon 
their horns. Probably the people of Jericho thought the Is- 
raelites very foolish indeed. No doubt they laughed at them, 
and made sport of them ; but this did not last long. 

On the seventh day the people marched around the city 
seven times. The last time around, thej^ gave the great shout, 
and down came the wall of Jericho to the ground. No per- 
son had touched it, but there it lay, and G-od's people were 
free to enter the city. 

Joshua sent the two spies to Rahab's house, to take her 
and her family out of the city. Jericho was then destroyed, 
and nearly everything in it. G-od told the Israelites to save 
nothing but the gold and silver and brass. This was not 
to be kept for themselves, but was to be given to the Lord. 
One man did not do as G-od had said, but took some gold 
and silver and nice clothing, which he hid away for himself 
We shall see by and by what became of him. 



LESSON LXX. 
achan's sin. 



From Jericho, Joshua sent spies to a place called Ai. They 
brought back word that Ai was a small city, and that the peo- 



THE GIBEONITES. 91 

pie there were few. They said the city could be taken easil}~, 
and they thought there was no need of sending all the men of 
Israel against it. 

Joshua listened to the spies, and sent only a small number 
of his men to the battle. But God did not go with them, and 
the people of Ai drove them back, and killed some of them, 

Joshua felt greatly troubled when he heard how the battle 
had turned, and he went to the tabernacle, and fell upon his 
face before the ark. God came to him there, and told him 
why he had not helped the Israelites in the battle. He said 
there was a man among them who had stolen some things from 
Jericho, and had hidden them awa}\ God said he could not 
help his people while there was such a wicked person among 
them. He told Joshua to find the man and destroy him, with 
all that he had. 

Joshua then went to the people, and began to talk with 
them. He finally learned that a man by the name of Achan 
was the one who had stolen the goods. Joshua then sent to 
the man's tent, and found the gold and silver, and the cloth- 
ing hidden in a hole in the ground. Achan was then taken 
to a valley, and stoned to death, and his bod}^ and all his 
goods were burned. 

Afterward God sent his people against Ai again. This 
time the Lord went with them, and helped them to destroy that 
wicked city. 

LESSON LXXL 

THE GIBEONITES. 

The people of Canaan soon heard how the Israelites had 
destroyed Jericho and Ai. The word went through all the 
land, and many of the people were much afraid. 

In one city lived some people called Gibeonites. The}' 
feared the Israelites greatly, and were anxious to make peace 
with them ; that is, they wanted the Israelites to promise to 



92 



THE GIBEOXITES. 



do them no harm if the} r would do the same by the Israelites. 
The Gibeonites knew that God's people would not make this 
promise to the people of Canaan, so they decided to go to 
Joshua and pretend that they were from another country. 
B} T deceiving in this way. they hoped to make peace with the 
Israelites. 

A compan} r of them went to see Joshua. The}* put on some 
old clothing and shoes, and took with them bread that was dry 
and moldy. They also carried wine bottles that were old and 
torn. 

When the G-ibeonites came to Joshua, he asked them who 

they were, and from what 
place thej r had come. They 
answered that they were 
from a far country, and had 
come to make peace with 
the Israelites. The men of 
Israel said to them, "Per- 
haps you live in Canaan ; 
how then can we make 
peace with you? " "No," they said, "we have come from a 
very far country. This bread we took hot from our houses 
when we started, and these bottles were new. Our clothing 
also has become old because of our long journey." Joshua 
thought the men must surely be telling the truth, and so the 
Israelites made peace with them. 

Three days afterward Joshua found out that he had been 
deceived, and that the Gibeonites were people of Canaan, and 
his near neighbors. 

The Israelites had promised to do the Gibeonites no harm, 
and they had to keep their word ; so when Joshua came to the 
city where these people lived, he did not destroy them, but 
made them servants to the Israelites. They had to draw the 
water and cut the wood. 




"WINE BOTTLES. 



JOSHUA TAKES CANAAN. 93 

LESSON LXXIL 

JOSHUA TAKES CANAAN. 

The people of Canaan became more and more afraid of 
the Israelites eveiy day. At last five of the kings of the land 
decided to unite in fighting against God's people. They 
gathered their soldiers together, and made a very great army. 
With so many men, they thought they could surely drive the 
Israelites out of the land. But God was with his people, and 
he sent great hailstones, which destro}'ed man}^ of their 
enemies. 

At this same time, Joshua commanded the sun and the 
moon to stand still that the day might be longer, so that God's 
people could have time to drive their enemies away. This 
was a strange thing for Joshua to do ; but God did for him 
what he wished, and the sun and the moon stood still for 
nearly a whole day. 

After this, the Israelites still pushed on into Canaan as 
God had commanded them. 

Joshua was now an old man, nearly one hundred and ten 
years old. He knew that he must soon die, so he called the 
people together, and divided the land among them. He talked 
with them very kindly, telling them how good God had been 
to them, and urging them to serve him faithfully. He said 
they must be very careful not to make friends with the wicked 
people of Canaan, nor do like them, but must drive them 
out of the land. Not long after this, Joshua died, and the 
people buried him in Canaan. They also buried Joseph's 
bones, which the}' had been carrying with them ever since 
they had left Egypt. 

Eleazar, the high-priest, also died about this time. He 
was buried in a hill. 



94 JUDGES CHOSEN FOR GOD'S PEOPLE. 

LESSON LXXIII. 

JUDGES CHOSEX FOR GOD'S PEOPLE. 

After the death of Joshua, the Israelites were led by per- 
sons called judges. These judges taught the people, and 
helped them as Moses and Joshua had done. They were 
chosen hy the Lord. 

God had told the Israelites to destroy all the people of 
Canaan, but they did not do this, and G-od was displeased 
with them. Finally an angel came to the Israelites, and told 
them that because they had disobeyed in this matter, the Lord 
was goiug to leave the people of Canaan in the land to be 
thorns in their sides. He meant by this that the people of 
the land would be a great trouble to the Israelites, and we 
shall see as we study further, that they were. 

The people of Canaan did not worship the true God. 
They worshiped idols, or images, and after a few years the 
Israelites began to do so too. This of course was very 
wicked in God's sight, and he could not help his people as be- 
fore. He was not with them to keep them from harm, and 
man}- times he allowed them to become servants to wicked 
kings. 

At one time they had been servants to one of these kings 
eighteen years. At last they left their idols, and cried to 
God for help. God was always willing to hear his people 
when they tried to do right, so he chose a man bj T the name 
of Ehud to be their judge. 

Ehud saved God's people at this time ; and while he lived, 
they served the true God. 

After Ehud died, the people began to worship idols again. 
God then left them, and they became servants to wicked peo- 
ple as before. For twenty years, they were treated very 
cruelly, and again they cried to God for help. God then 
chose another judge to lead them. This judge was a woman, 



THE LORD COMES TO GIDEON. 95 

and her name was Deborah. The Lord came to her, and told 
her what his people should do, and the}' were soon free from 
their enemies ao-ain. 



LESSON LXXIV. 

THE LORD COMES TO GIDEON. 

After a time the Israelites were much troubled by some 
wicked people who did not live in Canaan. The}^ came into 
the land, however, in great numbers, and pitched their tents. 
They destroyed the fruit and crops, and stole the sheep and 
oxen. They made the Israelites so much trouble that at last 
G-od's people left their homes and lived in caves and dens of 
the mountains. The Israelites were troubled in this wa}^ for 
seven years. God then sent some one to help them. 

One day an Israelite by the name of Gideon was threshing 
wheat. He was off by himself where his enemies would not 
be likely to find him. While at work there, a man came and 
sat down under a tree ^that stood near by. The man said to 
Gideon, "The Lord is with thee." Gideon answered, "If the 
Lord is with us, wiry does he let our enemies trouble us ? 
Why does he not do wonderful things for us as he did for our 
fathers long ago?" "No," he said, "the Lord is not with 
us ; he has forsaken us." The Lord, for he it really was, said 
to Gideon, "You shall save the Israelites from their enemies." 
Gideon thought he could not be the one. He said his father 
was poor, and he was the least in his father's family. The 
Lord answered, "Surely I will be with thee." Gideon then 
asked for a sign by which he might know that he was talking 
with the Lord. He brought out some food, and placing it 
upon a stone which lay near, poured broth upon it. The 
Lord then touched the food with the end of his staff, and fire 
came out of the stone and burned it. Afterward he departed 
out of sight. Gideon then knew that he had surely been talk- 
ing with the Lord, and he was afraid. 



96 THE FLEECE OF WOOL. 

That night G-od came to Gideon, and told him not to be 
afraid, but to go out and throw down a certain idol that the 
people worshiped. Gideon did not dare to do this by daylight, 
but at night he, with ten of his servants, did as G-od had 
commanded. 

The next morning the people wondered who it could be 
that had treated their god so shamefully. The} T soon found 
out, and they wanted to kill Grideon, but his father kept them 
back. 

The wicked people of Canaan then gathered their armies 
together for battle. Gideon saw what they were doing, so he 
blew a trumpet, and sent men out in different directions to 
gather the men of Israel together. They obe}-ed the call, and 
came to Gideon, willing to follow him in battle. 



LESSON LXXV. 

THE FLEECE OF WOOL. 

Gideon feared that he was not the one to lead God's peo- 
ple against their enemies. He did not think himself a very 
great man, and he thought it strange that the Lord should 
choose him. He felt that he must be sure about the matter 
before he started, so he asked that another sign might be 
given him. He said that at night he would put out a fleece of 
wool, and in the morning if there was dew upon the wool, and 
none upon the ground, he should know that the Lord had 
sent him. Earl} 7 in the morning Gideon went to get the 
wool. He found the ground dry, but out of the wool he 
wrung a bowlful of water. Gideon then said to the Lord, 
" Do not be angry with me, but let me try once more. I will 
put the fleece out again, and if the wool be found dry, and the 
ground wet, then I shall surely know that you have sent me." 
In the morning it was as Gideon had asked, — the wool was 
dry, but all around it the ground was wet with the heavy dew. 



THE FLEECE OF WOOL. 97 

Gideon then gathered the Israelites together for war, but 
God said the people were too man}'. He told Gideon that 
if such a large number of men should go to the battle, they 
would say that they, and not the Lord, had destroyed their 
enemies. 

Gideon then told the Israelites that all who were afraid 
might go back. Man}* more than half were glad to do so, but 
the Lord said that the army was still too large. He told 
Gideon to have the men march past some water. Those who 
took time to kneel down and drink, God said should go back, 
but those who seemed in great haste, and simply lapped the 
water out of their hands as they went, — these, the Lord said, 
should go on. 

When the army came to the water, nearly all kneeled to 
drink. These were then sent back, and the few that were left 
went on with Gideon to the battle. The Israelites knew then 
that they themselves could do nothing. Unless God should 
help them, they would surely be driven back by their enemies. 

That same night the Lord came to Gideon, and told him 
to take his servant, and go down where their enemies were 
tenting, and he should hear what they said. 

Gideon did as the Lord had commanded, and when he and 
his servant came to the camp of their enemies, they over- 
heard two men talking ; one was telling the other his dream. 
He said, "I dreamed that a loaf of bread rolled into our 
camp and knocked over a tent." The other man seemed 
much troubled when he heard the dream. He said it could 
mean nothing else but that the Lord had given them into the 
hands of the Israelites. 

When Gideon heard this, he knew that God was going to 
help his people. He saw that the Lord was filling the 
hearts of their enemies with great fear. 



98 Gideon's army. 

. LESSON LXXVI. 

GIDEON'S ARMY. 

Gideon went back to his men, and told them to arise and 
go forward, for the Lord was with them. Before starting, he 
gave each man a horn and a pitcher, and in each pitcher was a 
lighted lamp. The men had no swords and no guns, — nothing 
at all to fight with. — but Gideon told them to follow him, and 
when they came to the camp of their enemies, to do as he did. 

The Israelites reached the tents of their enemies about 
midnight. All was quiet, and no one seemed to be stirring. 
The people were very man}', — as many as grasshoppers, the 
Bible says, — and their camels could hardly be counted. 
Their tents lay all along the valley, and to Gideon and his few 
men, the army must have looked very great. 

Gideon quietly placed his men around the camp of the 
enemy. He and all his men then blew upon their horns, and 
shouted, "The sword of the Lord and of Gideon!" At the 
same time, they broke their pitchers with a great crash, and 
the light burst forth. 

The people inside the tents were awakened very suddenly 
by the noise and shouting, and when the} T saw the lights flash 
out all around them, they were terribly frightened. They 
supposed that a great army with swords and spears, had come 
into their camp, and they jumped up, and began to kill one 
another in the darkness, thinking that they were killing the 
Israelites. 

God's people could not have hurt their enemies. They 
had nothing to do it with, but the Lord was with them, and 
it was he who caused all this fear, and made those wicked 
people kill one another. The army at last fled, and left their 
tents and everything behind them. The Israelites who had 
not come to the battle, then joined Gideon and his men, and 
followed after their enemies, and drove them out of the land. 



RUTH. 99 

The Israelites afterward wanted Gideon to be their king. 
The}' saw that the Lord was with him, and they wished to 
have him rule over them. Gideon said to them, " I will not 
rule over you, but the Lord shall rule over you." 

God helped Gideon in his battle, and God will help us in 
our battles. All of us, even little children, have things to 
fight against. There are the cross words, the cross looks, and 
the wrong stories. These and many more are truly our ene- 
mies, but God can help us destroy them, and he is just as 
willing to do so as he was to help Gideon. 



LESSON LXXVII. 

RUTH. 

For some time before Gideon was sent to help God's peo- 
ple, thej- led a very unhappy life. Their enemies, }'ou remem- 
ber, destro} T ed their fruit and grain, and also stole their cattle. 
In order to get away from these wicked people, many of the 
Israelites lived in the caves of the mountains. About this 
time there was also a famine in Canaan, and one man that we 
read about, took his family, and moved to another country. 

Not long after this family reached their new home, the 
father died, leaving his wife and two sons. The sons, after a 
time, married. The wife of one was named Orpah ; the wife 
of the other, Ruth. 

The people of this country did not worship the true God. 
The}^ worshiped idols, as did the wicked people of Canaan. 
The parents of Orpah and of Ruth, and all their friends wor- 
shiped idols, and so of course did these girls, because they 
had never known a better way. 

By and by both of ±he sons died, and their mother, with 
Orpah and Ruth, was left alone. After a time they heard 
that the Lord had helped his people in Canaan, and had given 
them food, so the mother thought she would go back to her 



100 BOAZ. 

own land. Her sons' wives wished to go with her, and started 
to do so ; but after thinking the matter over, Naomi, for that 
was the mother's name, thought it would be better for them 
to go back and live with their own parents. She was afraid 
they would not be contented in a strange land, and would 
soon want to go home. Naomi told her daughters why she 
thought they would better go back, but neither wished to do 
so. They both loved her, and she loved them, and it was hard 
for them to see her go away. After a time Orpah made up 
her mind to go back, so she kissed her mother tenderly, and 
returned to her own parents and to her idols. But Ruth 
would not go. She said to Naomi, "Ask me not to leave you. 
Where j t ou go, I will go, and where you stay, I will stay. 
Your people shall be my people, and your God shall be my 
God. Where } T ou die, I will die, and there will I be buried." 
When Naomi saw how Ruth loved her, she urged her no more, 
and they went on their way toward Canaan. 

Do n't you think Ruth must have been a very good woman? 
It must be that God cared for her, and no doubt he put it into 
her heart to go to Canaan, so that she could learn more about 
the true God. How happy the poor, lonely mother must 
have felt when Ruth said, "Your people shall be my peo- 
ple, and your God shall be my God " ! 



LESSON LXXVIII. 

BOAZ. 

When Naomi and Ruth came into Canaan, Ruth wanted to 
work in the harvest field. They were poor, and she wished 
to do all she could to help earn their living. 

In those days farmers did not have machines to rake up 
their grain. Men were hired for that work, and the few spears 
which they left, were gathered by poor women and girls, who 
were glad to get the grain for food. This was the work that 
Ruth wished to do. 



BOAZ. 



101 



Naomi was willing that her daughter should go, so one 
morning Kuth started out to see what she could find. She 
soon came to a field where were some women following the 
reapers, and she asked the men if she might work there too. 
They told her she might, so she began to gather the grain. By 
and by Boaz, the owner of the field, came out to see his reapers. 
He noticed Ruth working with the others, and he asked his 




BOAZ AND RUTI 



servants who she was. The} T told him that she was a woman 
who had come to Canaan with Naomi. 

Boaz then went to Ruth, and spoke to her very kindly. He 
told her that he had heard how good she had been to her 
mother-in-law, and he said he hoped G-od would reward her for 
what she had done. Boaz told Ruth that she need not go 
home to dinner. He said that she might eat with the reapers. 
He also told her that she might come to his field and work 



102 SAMSON AND THE LION. 

every day. Before leaving the field. Boaz told his reapers to 
drop a handful of grain now and then on purpose so that 
Buth could get it. 

Buth was very happy because of the kindness shown her. 
All day long she worked as hard as she could, and when night 
came, she had all the grain she could carry, She took it home, 
and her mother was surprised to see how much she had gath- 
ered. Naomi asked her where she had worked. She said she 
had been working in a field that belonged to a man named 
Boaz. and that he had been very kind to her. Naomi was 
then more surprised than ever. "Why," said she, '-Boaz is 
one of our old friends, — a near relative of my husband!" 
and Naomi thanked the Lord. These poor women were very 
glad to find such a kind friend, for he was not only rich, but 
good. 

Now there is something more to tell you about Boaz. Do 
you remember Bahab, the woman of Jericho who hid the spies 
on the top of her house ? "Well, this man was Bahab's son. 
After a time he married Buth, and then she and Naomi had a 
good home, and everything they needed. 



LESSON LXXIX, 

SAMSON AND THE LION. 

After Gideon died, the Israelites became servants to the 
Philistines again. The Lord let this trouble come upon 
them because of their sins, and for many years they had a 
very hard time. 

After a while an angel came to one of the women of the 
Israelites, and told her that God was going to give her a little 
boy. He said that God would be with the child, and when he 
came to be a man. would help him to destro} T the Philistines. 
The angel told the woman that the child's hair must never 
be cut. 



SAMSON AND THE LION. 



103 



The mother named her little boy Samson. He grew rapidly, 
and it seemed but a little while until he was a young man. 
He knew what the Lord wanted him to do, and as soon as he 
was old enough, was ready for his work. 

Samson told his parents that he wished to marry one of 
the Philistine 
women. His par- 
ents thought that 
very strange. 
The}' asked him 
why he did not 
marry one of his 
own people in- 
stead of taking a 
wife from among 
their enemies. 
Samson's reason 
for doing this was 
that he wanted to 
be with the Phil- 
istines, that he 
might find some 
way to destro} 7 
them. We do 
not know whether 
Samson's parents 
knew this or not, 
but they went with him, and helped him get his wife. 

One time, when he was going to see the woman that he was 
to marry, Samson met a lion in the way. All at once God 
gave him great strength, and he tore the lion in pieces as easily 
as though it were a tender lamb. Samson went on his way, 
but told no one what he had done. 

By and by he went to visit the woman again. This time he 




SAMSON KILLING THE LION. 



104 samson's riddle. 

was going to many liei\ On the way he saw the lion that he 
had killed, lying by the road-side. Turning aside to look at it 
more closely, he found among the bones a swarm of bees and 
some hone} 7 . Samson took the honey and ate of it. He also 
carried some to his father and mother, but he did not tell them 
where he had found it. 



LESSON LXXX. 
samson's riddle. 

When the time came for Samson to be married, he made a 
great feast. It lasted seven da}*s, and all had a merry time. 
Among those invited to the wedding were thirty young men of 
the Philistines. 

At the beginning of the feast, Samson proposed to give 
these young men a riddle. He said that if they could guess it 
before the seven days were past, he would give them thirty 
changes of clothing ; but if the} 7 could not guess it, they must 
give him thirty changes of clothing. The young men agreed 
to the plan, and wanted to hear the riddle, so Samson gave it 
to them. It was this: " Out of the eater came forth meat ; out 
of the strong came forth sweetness." Before you read any 
further, see if you can guess the riddle. Don't you remember 
the lion and the honey that Samson found among its bones? 

The young men were very anxious to guess the riddle, but 
they could not. The seventh day came, and still they had not 
guessed it. They then went to Samson's wife, and told her that 
if she did not find out the meaning of the riddle, and tell them, 
they would burn her and her father's house. 

Samson's wife did not tell her husband what the young 
men had said to her, but simply asked him to tell her the riddle. 
Samson did not wish to do so, but his wife tfrged and cried, 
and seemed to feel so hurt over the matter, that at last he made 
it known to her. She then told the young men. 



SAMSON TAKEN BY THE PHILISTINES. 105 

At the end of the feast, the young Philistines came to Sam- 
son and said, " What is sweeter than honey, and what is 
stronger than a lion?" Samson then knew that his wife had 
told the riddle. He was very angiy, and he went out and 
killed thirt}' Philistines, and gave their clothing to the thirty 
young men. He then returned to his own father's house. 

After a time Samson went back to see his wife. When he 
came to her home, he found that her father had given her to 
another man. Samson was then in a great rage again. He 
went out and caught three hundred foxes. These he tied 
together, two by two, by their tails, and between each pair of 
tails fastened a torch. He then set fire to the torches, and let 
the foxes loose in the Philistines' grain, which was ripe and 
read} T to be harvested. Of course the grain was burned and 
desti'03-ed. 

The Philistines were so angry that they took Samson's wife 
and her father, and burned them to death. Because of this 
wicked act, Samson killed many more of the Philistines. 
They then gathered together, and went after Samson to put 
him to death. 



LESSON LXXXI. 

SAMSON TAKEN BY THE PHILISTINES. 

The Israelites were much frightened when they heard 
what Samson had done to the Philistines. The}^ thought 
they would better do something to please their enemies at 
once, so they took Samson and bound him, and gave him to 
the Philistines. 

Samson was very strong, and he would not let the Israel- 
ites bind him until they had promised that the}^ themselves 
would not kill him. He was bound with two new cords, and 
when he was brought to the Philistines, they gave a great 
shout. They thought they could now punish him for the 
harm he had done them. But the Lord helped Samson, and 



106 SAMSON TAKEN BY THE PHILISTINES. 

he broke the cords as though there was no strength in them. 
He then picked up a large bone that was lying near, and killed 
man}' hundreds of his enemies. The Lord took this wa} T to 
punish the Philistines. 

The Israelites saw that God was with Samson, and from 
that time he was their judge for twenty years. 

Samson next went to one of the Philistine cities to stay 
all night. This city, like Jericho, had a high wall, and at 

night the gate was 

shut and locked. 

The Philistines 

heard that Samson 

was in their city, 

and they thought 

that in the morning 

as he passed out of 

the gate, they would 

take him. Samson 

seemed to know 

what his enemies 

samsoh carrying the gate. intended to do, so 

in the night he arose, and taking the heavy gate with its posts 

and bars, carried it upon his shoulders to the top of a high 

hill, and left it there. He then went awa}- . 

After a time Samson became acquainted with another 
Philistine woman. His enemies noticed that he visited her 
quite often, so they went to her, and told her to find out what 
made Samson so strong. The woman asked him, and he pre- 
tended to tell her. He said that if he should be bound with 
seven new cords, he would be no stronger than other men. 
She then bound him, but as soon as the Philistines came 
near, he broke the cords as though they were thread. 

Three different times Samson told the woman what to do 




samson's death, 107 

to take awa}- his strength, but every time he deceived her. At 
last, to get rid of her teasing, he told her the truth about the 
matter. He said that if his long hair should be cut, his 
strength would be gone. 

Soon after this, Samson visited the woman's house again, 
and while there, lay down to sleep. The woman at once sent 
for a man to come and cut his hair. She also had some Phil- 
istines in another part of the house ready to take him if his 
strength should realty be gone. After Samson's hair was cut, 
the woman called to him ; and when he arose, he saw what 
had been done to him, and he felt that he was no stronger 
than other men. The Philistines then rushed in and took 
him. He could save himself no longer, so they put out both 
of his eyes, and carried him off to prison. 

Samson did very foolishly to let this wicked woman know 
about his hair. Perhaps he had begun to think that he would 
be strong no matter whether it was cut or not. But he soon 
found that he could not have God's help and at the same 
time disobey him. 



LESSON LXXXII. 

SAMSON'S DEATH. 

While in prison, Samson had to work very hard. He was 
bound with brass chains, and although blind in both eyes, was 
made to grind the grain. 

After a time Samson's hair began to grow again, and as it 
grew, his great strength came back. His enemies did not 
seem to know this. If they did, they must have thought that 
his blindness would keep him from doing any harm, for they 
did not appear to be afraid of him. 

One day the Philistines were having a great time praising 
their god Dagon. This god was an idol, of course, made by 
men, and was a horrible looking object indeed. He was set 



108 SAMSON'S DEATH. 

up in a large building, and there all the great men of the Phil- 
istines were gathered together to make him offerings and to 
praise him. They said he was a great god, — much greater 
than the Gk>d of the Israelites, for he had given Samson into 
their hands. 

While having such a merry time, the Philistines thought 
they would have Samson brought out of the prison to make 
sport for them. They sent for him, and he came in, led by a 
boy. The house was full of people, and he made sport for 
them as they wished. He was then led to one side, and he 
stood near two of the great posts that held up the building. 
He asked the boy who had him by the hand to let him lean 
against these posts. The boy did so, and Samson, putting an 
arm around each post, leaned up against them as though he 
were resting. While standing there, Samson prayed God to 
give him strength, just that once, that he might destroy the 
Philistines. He then pushed with all his might, his arms 
around the posts, and the building fell. Most of the people 
were killed, and Samson with them. He knew that he would 
be killed too, for as he bowed himself down, he said, "Let 
me die with the Philistines." 

When it was told the Israelites that Samson was dead, 
his father and brothers came and took him away, and buried 
him. 

Samson was a strange man. He was both good and bad. 
He wanted to do right, but still he was always doing wrong 
and getting into trouble. It must be that he did not pray 
enough for Grod's help. Grod did help him some, and gave 
him great strength, but he would have helped him much more 
if he had always been a good man. Grod cannot work for peo- 
ple who are wicked. If we want his help, we must be good, 
and do as he says. 



LITTLE SAMUEL. 109 

LESSON LXXXIII. 

LITTLE SAMUEL. 

After the Israelites came into Canaan, they did not live in 
tents any longer, neither did they wander about from place to 
place. They then had houses and land of their own, and lived 
more as people do now. 

The tabernacle was pitched at a place called Shiloh, and left 
there with the priests. Every year all the Israelites would go 
to the tabernacle to make their offerings and to worship God. 

About the time that Samson lived, a little boy was born and 
named Samuel. His mother promised to give him to the 
Lord ; so as soon as he was weaned, his parents took him, and 
went up to Shiloh to the tabernacle. The mother told the 
priest who she was, and then showed him her little boy. She 
said she had prayed the Lord to give her the child, and now 
that he had done so, she was going to lend him to the Lord as 
long as he lived. 

The parents made their offering, and went back home, and 
little Samuel was kept in the tabernacle. Every year when the 
parents came to Shiloh to worship, they saw their child, and 
the mother always remembered to bring him a new coat for 
a present. 

The high-priest at this time was a man named Eli. He 
loved little Samuel very much. As the child grew older, Eli 
taught him to do the work of the tabernacle, and Samuel was 
always glad to learn, and to help in any way that he could. 

Eli slept in one part of the tabernacle and Samuel in an- 
other. One night the child heard some one calling him. 
Thinking it was Eli, he ran to him, and said, k 'Here I am." 
Eli said, " I did not call you ; lie down again." Samuel obeyed, 
but soon he heard the voice again. A second time he went to 
Eli, but the priest told him the same as before, and sent him 
back. Three times the child heard some one calling to him, 



110 THE ARK TAKEN BY THE PHILISTINES. 

and three times he went to the priest. Eli began to think that 
perhaps the Lord was speaking to the child, so he told him that 
if any one spoke to him again, to say, "Speak, Lord, for thy 
servant heareth." 

Samuel went back to his bed. Pretty soon he heard his 
name called, "Samuel, Samuel." The little fellow then an- 
swered, "Speak, Lord, for thy servant heareth." 

It was really the Lord who was speaking, and in our next 
lesson we will learn what he said to Samuel. 

Would you like to wake up in the night, and hear the Lord 
calling you ? Would you be afraid ? You would not if you 
are always good. God will not hurt good people. He loves 
them, — even more than parents love their children, and he is 
always willing to help them. No one in the whole world is as 
good to us as G-od is. He does not want us to be afraid of 
him ; he wants us to get acquainted with him, and to love him 
with all our hearts. 



LESSON LXXXIV. 

THE ARK TAKEN BY THE PHILISTINES. 

When Grod came to Samuel, it was to tell him about Eli's 
sons. Grod had chosen little Samuel for his prophet, and so he 
came to him with a message for Eli. 

Eli was a priest, and he had two sons, who were priests. 
These sons were wicked. They had not been made to mind 
when they were young, and as they grew older, they became 
worse and worse. Eli knew that his sons were bad, but he did 
not like to punish them, so he let them go on having their 
own way. 

When God came to Samuel that night, he told him that he 
was displeased with Eli because he had let his sons do so 
wickedly. Grod said that both of these sons should die in one 
day, and that Eli's family should not long be priests. 



THE ARK TAKEN BY THE PHILISTINES. Ill 

In the morning Samuel arose, and went about his work as 
usual. He said nothing about what the Lord had told him. 
No doubt he dreaded to tell Eli because of the sorrow it would 
give him. Finally, Eli said to Samuel, " What did the Lord say 
to you ? Do not hide anything from me, but tell me all." 
Samuel then told Eli all that the Lord had said, and the poor old 
father answered, " It is the Lord, let him do what seemeth 
good." After this, Eli and all the people knew that God had 
chosen Samuel for a prophet. 

It was about this time that Samson died, and killed so 
many of the Philistines. There were still many of these 
wicked people in the land, and the Israelites thought they 
would go against them and destroy them. But when the 
Israelites met their enemies in battle, instead of destroying 
them, they found themselves driven back, and many of their 
men killed. 

The Israelites could not see why God did not help them. 
They did not like to give up the fight, so they thought they 
would get the ark and take it into the battle, and then 
the Lord would surely help them. No one but priests were 
allowed to carry the ark, so Eli's two sons went after it, and 
when they brought it into the camp, all the Israelites gave 
a great shout. But God did not help his people, and again 
they were driven back. This time the ark was taken by the 
Philistines, and Eli's two sons and many of the Israelites were 
killed. 

One of the men ran out of the army, and went to Shiloh. 
When he came to the city, he told the people what had hap- 
pened, and they all cried out. Eli, who was sitting by the city 
gate, waiting for some word from the battle, heard them. He 
had felt very much worried about the ark, and when the man 
came to him with the sad news that the ark was taken and that 
both of his sons were killed, he fell over backward, breaking his 
neck, and there he died. Eli was ninety-eight years old at this 
time, and the terrible news. was too much for him to bear. 



112 GOD CARES FOR THE ARK. 

It was very wrong for Eli to bring up his children as he 
did. He ought to have made them mind. G-od commands 
parents to have their children obey them. If Eli had done so, 
no doubt his sons would have become good men, and would not 
have brought so much trouble upon him and upon themselves. 



LESSON LXXXV. 

GOD CARES FOR THE ARK. 

As we learned in the last lesson, God did not help his peo- 
ple in the battle with the Philistines. There was a reason for 
this. The Israelites were not obeying him, — many of them 
were worshiping idols, and of course God could not go with 
them. 

The Israelites thought it a terrible thing to have the ark 
carried off by wicked people, and so it was ; but God went with 
it and cared for it. The Philistines took the ark to the house 
of their god Dagon, and set it down beside him. In the morn- 
ing, when they went in to see Dagon, they found him fallen 
down in front of the ark, with his head and both of his hands 
broken off. God must have thrown down the idol. Probably 
he did it to show those wicked people that their god was no 
God at all. He could not even help himself. How, then, 
could he help them ? 

The Philistines who were keeping the ark began to be very 
sick. They thought that the ark might be the cause of their 
trouble, so they sent it to another place. Then the people of 
that city were taken sick, and many died. So it was, wherever 
the ark went, there was sickness and death. The Philistines 
kept the ark seven months, and then decided to send it back to 
the Israelites. It had caused them so much trouble that they 
did not want it any longer. 

They made a new cart, and put the ark upon it. To the 
cart, they hitched two cows that had young calves. The 



THE ISRAELITES WANT A KING. 113 

calves, they shut up at home, and then left the cows free to go 
where they wished with the cart. The Philistines said that if 
the cows went away of their own accord and took the ark to 
the Israelites, they should then know that it was really the God 
of their enemies who had been troubling them. 

As soon as the cows were let loose, they started right off in 
the direction of the Israelites. They seemed to pa} r no atten- 
tion to their calves, but kept straight in the road, lowing as 
they went. Some of the Philistines followed to see what would 
become of the ark. 

After a while the cows came to a field where some Israel- 
ites were reaping their wheat. The cattle turned into the field, 
and when the Israelites saw the ark, they were very glad. 
They took it from the cart, aDd then made an offering to the 
Lord. The Philistines who were watching from a distance saw 
all this. Afterward they went back home. 

The Israelites were much pleased to have the ark again, 
but they seemed to have forgotten that God had said they must 
not touch it. They opened the ark, and looked into it. 
Because of this, God destro}'ed many of the people. 

The ark was then taken from this place to a city where it 
was kept in the care of the priests for twenty years. 



LESSON LXXXVI. 

THE ISRAELITES WANT A KING. 

After Eli died, Samuel was both judge and prophet. When 
he came to be an old man, the people went to him, and asked 
him to choose a king to rule over them. They said that other 
people had kings, and they wanted a king too. Samuel was 
displeased when he heard this, for he knew that the Lord did 
not think it best for his people to have kings. 

Samuel went to the Lord and told him what the people 
wanted, and the Lord told him to listen to them, and choose 



114 THE ISRAELITES WANT A KING. 

them a king. He said to Samuel, "They have not spoken 
against you, but against me. They do not want .me to rule 
over them. " How true that was ! God had led hi3 people 
and helped them, and now when they asked for a king, it was 
just the same as saying that they did not want God for their 
king. 

The Lord told Samuel to talk with the people and tell 
them how much better it would be for them to let the Lord 
rule over them as he had done, but if they would not listen, 
then to choose them a king. 

Samuel talked with the people as God had commanded 
him. He told them that a king would take their sons for his 
servants, and make them reap his harvests. Their daughters 
would have to become cooks and bakers. A king would also 
take the best of their grain and fruit, and a part of their 
cattle. Their servants and cattle would also be taken to do 
his work. Samuel told the people that the time would come 
when they would have much trouble because of their king, 
and then they would cry to the Lord for help, but he would not 
hear them. 

The people heard what Samuel said, but they seemed to 
think that they knew what would be best for them, and they 
answered, "No, but we will have a" king over us, someone 
to judge us, and go before us, and to lead us in our battles." 
How cruel and wicked it was for the people to do this way, 
when God had been so kind* to them! I wonder if they thought 
a king could bring down the walls of Jericho without touching 
them, or make the sun and moon stand still. They seemed to 
have forgotten how God had helped them, and had destroyed 
the wicked people who had fought against them. Do } x ou think 
3 T ou would have asked for a king if you had been one of God's 
people at that time ? 



SAUL CHOSEN KING. 115 

LESSON LXXXVII. 

SAUL CHOSEN KING. 

Among the Israelites was a young man named Saul. The 
Bible says he was a choice } 7 oung man, and among all the peo- 
ple there was no one more handsome than he. He was also 
much taller than the rest of the people. 

Saul's father was rich. He had man} T flocks and herds, and 
one day he sent Saul with a servant to look for some animals that 
had straj-ed away. After traveling around several days with- 
out finding them, Saul thought he would return home for fear 
that his father might become worried about him. The servant 
did not want to go back, he thought it would be better to go 
and see Samuel the prophet, as he might be able to tell them 
where to find the lost animals. 

Saul at last did as the servant wished, and they went to 
see Samuel. As they were going into the cit} T , they met the 
prophet at the gate, but did not know him. Saul asked him 
if he could tell them where they could find Samuel. Samuel 
answered that he was the one for whom they were looking, 
and he asked them to go home with him. 

Now the Lord had come to Samuel the day before, and had 
told him that a certain young man would come into the city 
the next day, and he had commanded Samuel to choose him 
for king. As soon as Saul spoke, Samuel knew him, for the 
Lord said, "This is the one of whom I spoke. He shall be 
king over my people." Samuel told Saul not to worry about 
the animals for they were found, but to come and eat with 
him. Samuel then took Saul and his servant home with him, 
and treated them very kindly. He had a long talk with Saul 
that night, and probably told him what the Lord wanted him 
to do. 

In the morning Saul rose early to go back home, and 
Samuel went part way with him. When they came to the 



116 SAMUEL TALKS WITH THE PEOPLE. 

outside of the city, Samuel told Saul to send the servant on 
ahead that they might be alone. Saul did so, and then Sam- 
uel took out a little bottle of oil, and pouring it upon Saul's 
head and kissing him, said, "The Lord has anointed you to be 
king over his people." 

Samuel then told Saul three things that would happen 
on his way home, to show him that the Lord had surely 
chosen him. Everything came to pass as the prophet had 
said ; but when Saul reached home, he said nothing in re- 
gard to the matter. He went about his work as before, and 
no one but Samuel knew that he was to be king. 



LESSON LXXXVIII. 

SAMUEL TALKS WITH THE PEOPLE. 

Not long after Saul went home, Samuel gathered all the 
Israelites together to one place. He talked with them, 
telling them how good God had been to them, and how he had 
led them, and cared for them. "But," said Samuel, "you do 
not want the Lord to rule over you, and have said, l Grive us a 
king,' so the Lord has given you a king, and Saul shall be the 
one to rule over you." 

The people then looked for Saul, but could not find him. 
The Lord told Samuel that he had hidden among the wagons 
and baggage. Saul was soon brought out, and when he stood 
before the people, so tall and king-like, Samuel said, "See 
whom the Lord has chosen ; there is none like him among all 
the people." They then gave a great shout, and said, "Grod 
save the king ! " 

God knew what kind of king the people wanted, and he 
gave them just such a one as would please them. They would 
not have been satisfied with a common-looking man. They 
wanted some one tall and noble-looking. But it is not the 



SAUL DISPLEASES THE LORD. 117 

most handsome people that are always the best, and it ma}' be 
that Saul was not as good as he appeared. 

After a time Samuel had another talk with the people. 
He told them that God was displeased with them for wanting 
a king, but he said that if they and their king would do right, 
God would still be with them ; if they did not do right, God 
would destroy them. Pointing to the clear sky, Samuel 
prayed God to send a thunder-storm to show the people that 
what he had been telling them was true. Although there 
were no signs of rain, the storm came, and the people were 
much frightened. They asked Samuel to pray for them that 
the}' might not die, and they confessed that they had done 
wrong in asking for a king. Samuel told them not to fear. 
He said they had sinned, but if they would now do right, the 
Lord would still care for them. 

As the people now had a king, Samuel was judge no 
longer. It was not his place to rule over them, but he was 
their priest and prophet as long as he lived. 



LESSON LXXXIX. 

SAUL DISPLEASES THE LORD. 

The Philistines were still in Canaan, and the Israelites 
had to do as they said in many things. Saul determined to 
drive these wicked people out of the land, and so made ready 
to go against them. The Philistines knew what Saul was go- 
ing to do, and they gathered themselves together to meet him. 
They had a very great army,' and many horses and chariots. 
When the Israelites -saw this great army, they were much 
afraid. Some of the people fled to the woods and mountains 
to hide, and even the soldiers trembled. 

Saul wanted Samuel to make an offering for him and his 
soldiers before they went into the battle, so he gathered his men 
together to a certain place, expecting to meet Samuel there. 



118 SAUL AGAIN DISOBEYS THE LORD. 

Saul waited several days, but Samuel did not come. Some of 
the soldiers began to leave, and go to their homes. Fearing 
that all would do so if they waited much longer, Saul thought 
he would make the offering himself, and he did so. Now this 
was a very wicked thing to do. God had said that no one but 
priests should burn the offerings, and Saul was not a priest. 

Saul had no more than finished making the offering when 
Samuel came. As soon as the prophet saw what had been 
done, he told Saul that he had acted very foolishly, and had 
disobej-ed the Lord. He said that because of this sin, he 
should not long be king, for God had chosen another man. 

Saul ought to have been more careful. It seems that he 
had not yet learned that God always means what he says. 
Perhaps he thought there would be no harm in his burning 
the offering just once, but there was harm in it, and G-od pun- 
ished him for his sin. 

When God tells us not to do anything, he does not want 
us to do it, — not even once. Nothing can make it right for 
us to disobey God, and we can never give a good excuse for 
doing wrong. Let us remember this, and be very careful in 
all that we do. 



LESSON XC. 

SAUL AGAIN DISOBEYS THE LORD. 

After a time, Samuel came to Saul and told him that the 
Lord wanted him to go against some wicked people living in 
another part of the country. God commanded Saul to destroy 
all of these people, and to leave nothing alive of all their 
cattle and flocks. Saul went to the battle, but did not do as 
the Lord had said. He saved the king alive, and also the 
best of the sheep and oxen. 

The Lord came to Samuel and told him what Saul had 
done. Samuel felt sad when he heard that Saul had diso- 



DAVID CHOSEN KING. 119 

beyed the Lord, and he spent all that night in praying to 
God. Earl} r in the morning he went to see the king. Saul 
seemed very glad to meet the prophet, and about the first 
thing he said, was that he had done as the Lord had com- 
manded, and had destroyed those wicked people. Samuel 
said to him, "What meaneth then this bleating of sheep and 
lowing of oxen, which I hear ? " Saul said the people had 
saved the best of the sheep and of the oxen to use in making 
offerings, but everything else had been destroyed. 

Samuel then told Saul that he had done very wickedly, 
and had disobeyed the Lord. Saul did not think so, and he 
began to make excuses. He said the king of those wicked 
people was in his hands, and the sheep and oxen were only 
kept for the Lord, and he thought he had done nothing wrong. 
Samuel told him that it was better to obey than to make of- 
ferings and not obey. 

Saul at last confessed his wrong to Samuel, and asked him 
to pray for him. At first, Samuel did not think it best to 
do so, and turned to go away, but Saul caught hold of his 
cloak, and urged him to stay. Finally, Samuel went back 
with him, and Saul worshiped the Lord. But the prophet 
told him that because of his sins Grod would soon put another 
king in his place. 

Samuel afterward went to his home, and he never came to 
see Saul again. 

» m > 

LESSON XCI. 

DAVID CHOSEN KING. 

After Samuel went back home, he felt much troubled. He 
could see that Saul was becoming a wicked man, and this 
made the good prophet very sad. 

Finally the Lord came to Samuel and told him not to feel 
sorrowful about Saul any longer, but to take his anointing oil 



120 DAVID CHOSEN KING. 

and go to the home of a man named Jesse. God said he had 
chosen a king from among this man's sons, and he commanded 
Samuel to go and anoint him. The prophet answered, " How 
can I go ? If Saul hear of it, he will kill me." God said 
to him, < ; Take a heifer with you, and make an offering with 
Jesse's family, and then no one will know why you go ; and I 
will show you what to do, and which son to choose." 

When the prophet came to Jesse's home, he asked him to 
come with his sons and make an offering. The sons came in, 
and the eldest was so tall and beautiful, that Samuel thought 
surely he must be the one the Lord had chosen. But God 
said he was not the man. He told Samuel that he did 
not look at the beautiful face and the nice form, but at the 
heart. 

God chose a man to suit the people when he selected Saul ; 
now he was going to choose a man to please himself, — a man 
with a good heart. 

Jesse had seven noble-looking sons with him, but as one 
after another was brought to Samuel, the Lord would say, 
"He is not the one." Samuel said to Jesse, "The Lord has 
not chosen these. Are all your children here?" Jesse 
answered that he had another son, David, the youngest, who 
was out tending the sheep. Samuel asked the father to send 
for his young son. He did so quickly, and when David came 
in, the Lord said to Samuel, "Arise, anoint him, for this is 
he." Samuel then took the oil, and pouring it upon David's 
head, told him that the Lord had chosen him to be king of 
his people. 

The matter was kept very still, and no one but the prophet 
and Jesse's family knew what had been done. Samuel went 
back to his home, and David still tended his father's sheep. 
David's great-grandparents were Boaz and Ruth. Do you re- 
member them ? 



GOLIATH THE GIANT. 



121 



LESSON XCII. 

GOLIATH THE GIANT. 

After Saul became so wicked, the Lord left kirn. He then 
had no one to help him, and Satan was near to do all the mis- 
chief he could. 

There were times when Saul acted ver} T strangely, — almost 
like a madman. 
He was ugly 
and wicked, and 
no one could do 
anything with 
him. His serv- 
a n t s thought 
that perhaps 
sweet music 
would help him, 
when he had 
these spells. 
They urged him 
to try it, and to 
choose some one who could use the harp well to come and 
play for him at such times. 

One of the servants said he knew a man by the name of 
Jesse, whose youngest son was a nice player upon the harp. 
Saul said he would like to see the young man, so they sent 
for him. When Saul saw David, and heard him pla}-, he was 
much pleased with him. He then sent to Jesse, and asked 
him to let David stay with him. Saul loved David, but he 
did not know that he had been chosen king in his place. 
When Saul had his mad spells, David would play upon the 
harp, and the king would feel better and become more quiet. 
David stayed with the king for some time, and then he went 
back home and cared for his father's sheep. 




DAVID PLAYING UPON THE HARP. 



122 DAVID VISITS SAUL'S ARMY. 

At this time the Israelites were having trouble with the 
Philistines again. They were going to have another battle, 
and both armies were in place, ready for the fight. 

One of the Philistine soldiers was a giant named G-oliath. 
He came out in front of Saul's army one day, and asked the 
Israelites to send one of their men to fight with him. He said, 
if he was killed, the Philistines would become servants to the 
Israelites, and if their man was killed, they must become serv- 
ants to the Philistines. 

Groliath was a large man, — almost as tall again as most men 
are, and nearly every part of his body was covered with iron 
or brass. In his hand, he carried a sharp spear. The Israel- 
ites thought it was of no use to send one of their men to fight 
such a man, and so they waited, not knowing what to do. 
Every day G-oliath would march out in front of Saul's army 
and make his offer, but day after day passed, and no one dared 
to meet him. 

LESSON XCIII. 
DAVID VISITS SAUL'S ARMY. 

Among Saul's soldiers were three of David's older brothers. 
David was not old enough to go to war, and so he stayed at 
home and tended to his work. One day Jesse sent David 
down to the army to take his brothers something to eat. When 
he came to the place where the armies were camping, he found 
them both standing in line, ready to begin the battle. Leav- 
ing his baggage in care of a servant, David ran quickly into 
the army to speak with his brothers. While talking with 
them, Goliath came out and began his boasting again, and 
Saul's soldiers turned to run. 

David was ashamed of the soldiers for being so afraid of 
this wicked man. He began to ask them questions, and rather 
talked as though he would be willing to meet the giant himself. 



DAVID MEETS GOLIATH. 123 

The oldest son of Jesse heard what his 3*oung brother said to 
the soldiers, and it made him very angry. He began to scold 
David, telling him that he was proud and naughty, and had 
come down just to see the battle. 

Some one ran and told Saul what David had said, and Saul 
sent for him. David told the king that he was willing to go 
and meet Goliath. Saul said, " You are not able to fight that 
giant, for you are but a youth, and he is a great soldier." 
David answered, that the Lord would help him, and would not 
let Goliath do him any harm. When Saul heard David talk 
in that way, he said, "Go, and the Lord be with you." Saul 
then put his own armor upon David, and gave him his sword. 
The armor was like that which Goliath wore. It was made of 
iron and brass, and covered nearly the whole body. David 
started to go, but he did not like his heavy iron dress, and 
he told Saul that he could not go with it, so he laid it off. 
He then took bis staff and sling, and choosing five smooth 
stones, went to meet Goliath. 

Was not David a brave young man? Why was he not 
afraid ? 



LESSON XCIV. 
DAVID MEETS GOLIATH. 

Goliath came out to meet David, covered from head to foot 
with his armor. By his side he carried a large sword, and 
before him walked a man carrying a shield. 

Goliath had supposed that the Israelites would send one of 
their greatest soldiers to meet him, and when he saw before 
him only a young man with no armor, and not even a sword, 
he was very angry. He was too proud to fight with such a 
little fellow, and he began to curse David. Said he, "Am I a 
dog, that you should come to meet me with a staff? I will 
give your flesh to the birds and the beasts." David said to 
him, " You have come to me with a sword, and with a spear, 



124 



DAVID MEETS GOLIATH. 



and with a shield, but I have come with God's help. This day 
he will °"ive }~ou into m}^ hand, and all the people shall see 
that there is a G-od among the Israelites." 

Goliath was then in a great rage, and he came toward David 
to kill him. David ran to meet Goliath, and putting a stone into 
his sling, threw it as he ran. The stone struck the giant on the 




DAVID AST) GOLIATH. 

forehead, and he fell down upon his face. David then ran 
quickly, and taking Goliath's sword, stood upon him, and cut 
off his head. 

When the Philistines saw that Goliath was dead, they 
turned and ran. Saul's army then gave a great shout, and fol- 
lowed after them. 

David was taken back to Saul's house, and the king would 
not let him go away again, but kept him there, and treated him 
with the greatest kindness. He also made him leader of his 
army. 



SAUL TRIES TO KILL DAVID. 12") 

When the soldiers came back from chasing the Philistines, 
the women came out in the street and sang a song. In this song 
they praised David more than they did the king. All the people 
seemed to love David, and all could see that the Lord was with 
him. These things made Saul jealous of David, and from that 
day he watched him closel}-. Had he known that David was 
to be king in his place, he would have been more jealous still. 



LESSON XCV. 
SAUL TRIES TO KILL DAVID. 

David was a good A'oung man. He tried to do right 
wherever he was, and God was with him every day. Saul 
noticed this. The people also saw it, and they alwa}-s spoke 
well of David, and thought him a wise young man. These 
things made Saul more jealous. He was all the time fearing 
that David would become a greater man than, he, and this 
troubled him greatly. Jealous people are always miserable, 
and so it was with Saul, — he was as unhappy as he could be. 
Nothing pleased him, and it was not long until he was thinking 
of some way to kill David. 

One day Saul was having one of his mad spells, and David 
went in to play for him. The very sight of David seemed to 
make him worse, and twice he threw a sharp spear at him, 
hoping to kill him. David jumped to one side, and so was not 
hurt, but he saw that the king was no longer his friend. 

After a time Saul sent David with the army to fight the 
Philistines again. He hoped that David would be killed in 
the battle, and that was why he sent him ; but the Lord helped 
David, and brought him back unharmed. Saul was then more 
jealous than ever, and he told his son Jonathan and his serv- 
ants that they must kill David in some way. 

Jonathan was not like his father. He was a good young 
man, and loved David as his own brother. He was not will- 



126 DAVID LEAVES SAUL. 

ing to harm his friend, so he went to him, and told him what 
the king had commanded, and urged him to go away and hide. 
Jonathan afterward talked with his father, and got him to 
promise that he would do David no harm. David then came 
back. 

It was not long, however, before Saul again tried to kill 
David. He threw his spear at him as before, but David ran 
from the room and went to his own house. Saul sent men 
to watch the house that night, so that David could not come 
out, for he intended to kill him in the morning. 

David's wife was Saul's daughter. In the night she let 
David down from a window, and he fled. She then put an 
image in his bed, and covering it up, made it look like a per- 
son. 

In the morning when the men came after David to take 
him, they heard that he was sick. Saul told his servants to 
bring David to him, even if they had to carry him on his bed. 
The3 T then went to get him, but when they came to his bed, 
they found him gone and the image in his place. 

After David fled from his home, he went to Samuel, and 
staj'ed with him. 

LESSON XCVI. 

DAVID LEAVES SAUL. 

Saul heard that David was staying with Samuel, and he sent 
men to take him. Three different times he sent for him, but 
every time God was ready to help David, and the men could 
do him no harm. Finalty, Saul went himself, but David fled, 
and returned to his own city. 

When Saul came back from Samuel's house, he pretended 
to feel very friendly toward David, but David was still afraid 
of him, and kept out of his way. 

One day David had a long talk with Jonathan. He told 



DAVID LEAVES SAUL. 127 

him what the king was tr} T ing to do, and said, "What is my 
sin, and what have I done to your father that he should want 
to kill me?" Jonathan could not believe that his father 
wished to do David any harm just then, and he told his 
friend so ; but David said to Jonathan, " Your father knows 
that we are friends, and so he does not tell you, but I am sure 
that there is only a step between me and death." Jonathan 
thought that David had no need to fear, but he felt very sorry 
for him, and promised to help him in any way that he could. 

In a few days Saul was going to have a feast. All of his 
great men were to be there, and David knew that he would be 
expected with the others. He did not dare to go, but he 
thought of a plan by which he could find out how the king 
reall} r felt toward him. 

He told Jonathan that he would not be at the feast, and 
asked him to make an excuse for him. David said, that if 
the king was very angry because of his absence, he should 
then know that the king still wished to kill him, and he asked 
Jonathan to bring him word as soon as the feast was over. 
He told his friend that he would hide in a field near by until 
he heard from him. 

The day of the feast came, and when all were in their 
places, Saul noticed that David was not there. He asked 
where he was. Jonathan then made an excuse for his friend, 
and Saul was very angry with his son. He told him to send 
after David, for he should surely die. Jonathan asked his 
father what David had done that he must die. This put Saul 
in a great rage, and he threw his spear at his son. Jonathan 
was then angry as well as his father, and he arose from the 
table and went out. 

In the morning Jonathan went to the field to see David. 
He told him what had happened at the feast, and they both 
knew that it was not safe for David to stay with Saul any 



128 SAUL KILLS THE PRIESTS. 

longer. David and Jonathan loved each other ver3 r much, 
and it was hard for them to think of separating. They wept 
together, and after promising that they would always be 
friends, they kissed each other and parted. Jonathan re- 
turned to the city, and David went off in another direction. 



LESSON XCVII. 

SAUL KILLS THE PRIESTS. 

After David left Jonathan, he went to a city called Nob. 
The tabernacle was then at that place, and the priests were 
there with it. David went to the high-priest, and asked him 
for some bread and a sword. He was told that there was no 
sword there but Goliath's. David said that would do, so the 
priest gave him some bread and the sword, and he went on his 
way. 

David came to one of the cities of his old enemies, the 
Philistines. They did not know him at first, but it was not 
long before they began to mistrust who he was. He heard 
the people saying to their king, " Who is this man ? Is he 
not David, the king of the land, — the one whom the people 
praise in their songs ? " David knew that his enemies would 
be very glad to get him into their hands, and he was afraid 
when he heard them talking in this way. He knew that he 
must do something to throw them off their guard, so he pre- 
tended to be a madman. When the king saw how he acted, 
he would not believe he was the one who had killed Goliath, 
neither would he have anything to do with him. The people 
then paid no more attention to David, and as soon as possible 
he left the city. He next went to a place, where were some 
great rocks, and hid in a cave. While there, his father and 
brothers came to see him. Four hundred men also joined 
him at that place, so he had quite a little army. 

We will now leave David for a time, and see what became 



JONATHAN VISITS DAVID. 129 

of the priests at Nob. When David was at that place, Doeg, 
one of Saul's servants, happened to be there, and he saw David, 
and knew what the priest gave him. When Doeg went back 
home, he told Saul all about it. Saul was very angry to think 
that David had escaped from him, and when he found that 
the priests had helped him, he determined to kill them. 

Saul sent for the high-priest, and when he came, asked 
him why he had helped his enemy to get away. The priest 3aid 
he did not know that David was the king's enemy. He sup- 
posed, he said, that David was his most faithful servant. But 
Saul would take no excuse, and he commanded his servants 
to kill the high- priest and all those who were with him. The 
servants would not do this. The} r were afraid to kill God's 
ministers. Saul then told Doeg to do it, and he was wicked 
enough to obey. That day Doeg killed eighty-five of the 
priests, and all the people of Nob were also destroyed. 

Onl} r one priest escaped. He fled, and went to David, who 
was glad to help him. David promised the young priest that 
no harm should come to him as long as the} r both should live. 



LESSON XCVIII. 

JONATHAN VISITS DAVID. 

It was not very pleasant for David to leave his home, and 

live hidden away in a cave. Most people would have thought 

they were having a very hard time had they been in his 

place. No doubt they would have complained and murmured 

against God. Perhaps they would have said to themselves, 

"God has not chosen me for king; it is all a mistake; 

he does not care for me." But David did not feel that way. 

He knew that God would bring everything out right by and 

by, and he was willing to wait. Instead of sitting down and 

finding fault with God, he began to look around to see if there 

was not something for him to do. 

9 



130 DAVID SPARES SAUL'S LIFE. 

After a time he heard that the Philistines were troubling 
some people living in a certain city. David thought that 
here might be a chance for him to do some good, so he asked 
the Lord if he should go and help the people of that city. 
The Lord told him to go, and he did so, and drove away the 
Philistines. David and his men then stayed in the city. 

When Saul heard where David was, he gathered his men 
together to go and take him. David heard what Saul was 
going to do, so he took his men and fled to the woods. 

Jonathan then came to visit David at that place. He was 
very glad to see his friend, and tried to comfort him all he 
could. He said to David, "Fear not ; my father cannot harm 
you. You shall some day be king, and I shall be next to 
you." How good and unselfish Jonathan was! He knew 
that the Lord had chosen David to be king in his place, but 
that did not make him jealous. He loved David just as well 
as ever, and always, as long as they lived, they were the best 
of friends. After staying with David a short time, Jonathan 
returned home. 

Some wicked people went to Saul and told him where he 
could find David. Saul then took his army, and went in search 
of him. He came so near David that only a mountain sepa- 
rated them, but word came that the Philistines were causing 
trouble in the land, and Saul had to go back and help his people. 
No doubt G-od brought this trouble upon Saul so that he would 
have to return from following David. 



LESSON XCIX. 

DAVID SPARES SAUL'S LIFE. 

After Saul was called home, David and his men went to 
a place near the sea. It was a wild, rocky country, and there 
were many large caves in which the men could hide. 



THE RICH MAN, NABAL. 131 

Saul soon followed David to this- place, with some of 
his best soldiers. Coming to a large cave, Saul went in alone 
and lay down, that he might get a little rest and sleep. 

Now David and his men were hiding in the same cave, but 
it was dark, and Saul did not see them. The men kept very 
still until the king was asleep, and then they wanted to kill 
him. But David would not allow them to do so. He simply 
stepped to Saul's side, and quietly cut off a piece of his cloak, 
and then hiding himself again, waited until the king left the 
cave. 

After Saul awoke and went out, David followed and cried, 
"My lord the king." Saul then turned, and saw him with his 
face bowed down to the ground. David said to Saul, " Why 
do 3 T ou think I want to do } r ou harm ? See, here is a piece of 
your cloak that I took when 30U were in the cave sleeping. 
If I had wanted to do 3'ou evil, I could have done so, but 
I would not. Why then do you want to take m}' life ? " 

When David had finished speaking, Saul said, "Is this 
your voice, my son David?" and Saul wept aloud. He said, 
" You are better than I, for you have done me good when I 
was trying to do you evil." Saul then made friends with 
David, and went back to his place ; but David and his men 
stayed by the sea. 

About this time Samuel died, and the people gathered to- 
gether and mourned for him. They buried him in the city 
where he had lived. 



LESSON C. 

THE RICH MAN, NABAL. 

In the same country where David was staying, lived a rich 
man whose name was Nabal. He had many sheep and goats, 
and kept shepherds to care for them. David's men had alwa} T s 
been ver} r kind to these shepherds. They had kept thieves 



132 THE RICH MAN, NABAL. 

and wild animals from taking their flocks, and in many ways 
had treated them much better than most armies would have 
done. 

As David was in need of food for his men, he thought he 
would ask this rich man to help him a little. He sent ten of 
his 3'oung men with a very kind message, asking the man 
if he would not give them something to eat because, of the 
kindness they had shown him. 

Now Nabal was cross and ugly, everybody thought so, even 
his wife, and he answered the } T oung men very roughlj*, and 
would not give them anything. "When David heard how his 
message had been treated, he determined to punish Nabal for 
his wickedness. 

Nabal' s wife was not at all like her husband. She was 
kind and beautiful, and always willing to help others. When 
she heard how her husband had treated David, she wished to 
make the matter right. Taking two hundred loaves of bread, 
two bottles of wine, five sheep ready dressed, some corn, one 
hundred clusters of raisins, and two hundred cakes of figs, she 
went with her servant to see David. She did not want her 
husband to know what she was going to do, so everything was 
made ready quietly. 

On the way the woman met David and his arm}', who were 
then coming to destroy her husband's flocks, (retting down 
from the beast on which she was riding, the woman went to 
David, and bowed her face to the ground. She then talked 
with him, and begged him to do her and her family no harm. 
She said she knew that her husband was a bad man, but she 
urged David to spare him. 

After thinking the matter over, David made up his mind 
that it would not be doing just right to harm Nabal, so he took 
the present which the woman had brought, and went back. 

When Nabal's wife reached home, she found that her hus- 
band had been having a great feast, and was drunk. She did 



DAVID AGAIN SPARES SAUL'S LIFE. 133 

not tell him where she had been, or what she had done, until 
the next morning, when he was sober. Nabal then seemed 
much troubled over the matter, and in ten days he died. 



LESSON CI. 
DAVID AGAIN SPARES SAUL'S LIFE. 

Saul left David, pretending to be his friend, but he was 
not. He was ashamed to hurt David at that time, and so went 
home, but he had the same wicked feelings as before. 

David and his men stayed down by the sea, and it was 
not long until Saul came again with his army to take him. 
David heard that Saul was searching for him, so he sent out 
spies to see if it was really true. The men brought back word 
that Saul was surely coming, and with him several hundred 
of his best soldiers. 

David, with his nephew, then went in the night to the place 
where their enemies were camping. They found the whole 
army sleeping soundly. The soldiers were lying around upon 
the ground, and in their midst was Saul, with his spear by his 
side. Probabty some of the soldiers expected to keep watch, 
but the}^ could not do so, for G-od sent a deep sleep upon 
them. 

When David's nephew saw the king lying there so quietly, 
he wanted to kill him, but David would not let him. He told 
his nephew to take Saul's spear and the can of water that 
stood at his head ; and then they went away. After reach- 
ing the top of a hill afar off, David called to the soldier who 
was guarding Saul, and said, "Are you not a brave man? 
Who is like you among all the people ? Why have you not 
kept the king ? A man has been by his side who could have 
killed him. See now, where is the king's spear and his can 
of water?" Saul knew David's voice, and he said, "Is this 
your voice, my son David?" David answered, "It is my 



134 



DAVID AT ZIGLAG. 



voice, and why do you come after me to do me harm ? 
What evil have I done?" Saul then said, "I have sinned; 
return, my son David, for I will do } t ou no harm." David 
then told the king to send one of his men, and he would give 
him back his spear. Saul afterward returned to his home, and 
he never saw David again. 

Saul had pretended to be friendly to David so many times 
and afterward tried to kill him, that David did not believe in 
his pleasant words. After Saul went away this time, David 
thought he would better go where Saul could not follow him, 
so he took his family and army, and went to the same city 
where he had once acted as a madman. 



LESSON CII. 

DAVID AT ZIGLAG. 

In our last lesson, we left David and his men in a city of 
the Philistines. The king of the Philistines was very kind to 
David at this time. He thought that his old enemy had 
turned against the Israelites, and had come over to help 
him, and he was glad to receive him. He gave David and 
his men a city in which to live. It was called Ziglag. They 
stayed there over a year. 

The time came when the Philistines were going to have 
another battle with the Israelites. The king asked David and 
his men to join them, and they agreed to do so. 

When the great men of the Philistines saw David and his 
men in their army, they were not pleased. They did not trust 
him as much as their king did. They were afraid he would 
fight against them when he came into battle, and they wanted 
the king to send him and his men back. In order to please 
his soldiers, the king did as they wished, and so David did 
not have to fight against the people of the Lord. 



DAVID AT ZIGLAG. 135 

When David reached Ziglag, "he found trouble ahead of 
him. While he and his men had been away, some wicked 
people had come to the city and burned it, and had carried 
away all the women and children, and all the flocks and 
herds. The soldiers felt terribl}- when they saw what had 
been done, and they wept until they could weep no longer. 
They blamed David for their trouble, and talked of stoning 
him. David asked the Lord if he should follow after the 
people who had burned the cit} T , and the Lord told him to 
go. David then took his men, and went in search of their 
enemies. 

On the way they found a young man lying by the road, 
almost dead. They gave him something to eat and drink, 
and after a time he felt better, and was able to talk. David 
asked him who he was, and where he had come from. He 
answered that he was the servant of a man who, with others, 
had been to burn Ziglag. He said he had become sick on the 
way, and his master had gone and left him. Three days he 
had been lying there with nothing to eat or drink. David 
asked the young man if he would bring them to the men 
who had burned the cit} T . He said he would do so if David 
would promise not to harm him, nor allow his master to take 
him. 

The young man finally went with David and his men, and 
brought them to their enemies. When David reached their 
camp, they were having a merry time, eating and drinking 
and dancing, and feeling very joyful indeed because of what 
they had done to Ziglag. 

David and his men destroyed some of these wicked people, 
and drove the others away. The women and children were 
found unharmed, and also all the flocks and herds, which had 
been taken from the city. These, with everything that had 
been carried away, were taken back to Ziglag in safety. 



136 SAUL AND THE WITCH. 

LESSON CHI. 

SAUL AND THE WITCH. 

You learned in the last lesson that the Philistines and the 
Israelites were going to have another battle. We will now 
learn more about it. 

The Philistines had a very large arm}'. When Saul heard 
how great it was, he was afraid. He felt that he needed some 
one to help him, and to tell him what to do. He knew that 
it was of no use to ask the Lord, for the Lord had left him, 
and would not answer him. There were no priests to whom 
he could go, for he had caused them to be killed ; and he 
knew not what to do. 

There had been in the land wicked women called witches, who 
pretended to tell what was going to happen in the future. They 
said they talked with dead people, and from them learned all 
these secrets. Of course this was not true, but by deceiving 
the people in this way, the} T made a great deal of money. 

Saul had destroyed all the witches that he could find, but 
just at this time he heard of another, and he made up his 
mind to go and see what she would sa} T about the battle. He 
knew that she would be afraid of him if she knew him, so he 
dressed himself in such a way as to deceive her. He took 
two men with him, and went to see her at night. He told her 
that he wanted to hear from a certain dead person. The 
woman was afraid. She said the king wanted to destroy all 
witches, and she did not want to talk with the dead for fear 
of getting into trouble. Saul promised that no harm should 
come to her, so she asked him whom he wanted to see. He 
answered, "Samuel the prophet." The woman then saw 
something before her, and she was much surprised and fright- 
ened. She said to Saul, " Why have you deceived me ? You 
are Saul " He told her not to be afraid, but to tell him what 
she saw. The woman then described the person before her, 



DEATH OF SAUL AND JONATHAN. 137 

and Saul said it was Samuel. Of course the prophet was not 
there, for he was dead and buried, and the Bible says that 
dead people do not know anything. Probably Satan or some 
wicked angel made himself look like Samuel, and came there 
to talk with the wicked king. He told Saul that he should be 
king no longer, but that David should take his place. He 
also told him that both he and his sons would be killed the 
next day in battle, and that the Israelites would fall into the 
hands of the Philistines. 

When Saul heard this, he fell down upon his face, and his 
strength left him. He had eaten nothing for a day and a 
night, and he was very weak. He did not want to eat then, 
but his servants and the woman made him do so. After he 
began to feel a little better, he went back that same night to 
his army. 

m ■ » 

LESSON CIV. 

DEATH OF SAUL AND JONATHAN. 

Saul's visit to the witch did not bring him any comfort. 
No doubt he believed what he heard that night. If so, how 
sad he must have been ; for Samuel, as he supposed, had said 
that he must die ! When Saul went into the battle, he knew 
that the Lord did not go with him. He knew, too, that if he 
should be killed, he would die a wicked man. How terribly 
he must have felt ! 

The battle was a very hard one, and the Philistines gained 
in the fight. They followed after Saul and his sons, and at 
last killed Jonathan and two of his brothers. They also 
wounded the king. He was hurt so badly that he could not 
get away, so he asked his servant to kill him rather than 
to let the Philistines do it. The servant did not want to 
harm his master, so Saul took a sword and killed himself. 

When the Israelites heard that Saul and his sons were 



138 DAVID MADE KING. 

dead, they left their cities and fled. The Philistines then took 
the cities and lived in them. 

The next da}', when the Philistines came to cany away the 
dead people from the battle field, they found Saul. They cut 
off his head, and fastened his bod}' and the bodies of his sons 
to the wall of the city. During the night some people whom 
Saul had once helped, took the bodies away and buried them. 

When David heard from the battle, and knew that Jona- 
than and Saul were dead, he felt very sad. He asked the 
young man who had brought him the news, how he knew that 
the king and his sons were dead. The young man said that 
he came near Saul after he was hurt, and Saul begged him to 
kill him, and he did so. 

Now the young man had not killed Saul. He told that 
story just to make David think well of him. He supposed 
that David would be pleased with the man who had killed his 
enemy. Perhaps he thought David would make him a great 
man, or give him some rich present. But David did not feel 
at all pleased. He thought the young man had done a very 
wicked thing, and he told his servants to punish him because 
of what he had done to the king of God's people. 

David mourned for Jonathan a long time. It was hard 
for him to give up so dear a friend. While weeping over his 
death, he said, '0 Jonathan, I am distressed for thee, my 
brother Jonathan ! Very pleasant hast thou been to me : thy 
love to me was wonderful ! " 



LESSON CV. 

DAVID MADE KING. 

After Saul's death the Lord came to David, and told him to 
go to a city called Hebron. There the people made him king. 
He was not at first king of all the people, but of those living in 



DAVID MADE KING. 



139 



^&\-s^sii^BB 



Hebron and in that part of the country. The rest of God's 
people chose for their king a younger son of Saul. 

David was the one God had said should be king, but Saul's 
son was also king for seven } T ears. At the end of that time 
David was made king over all the people. He then left He- 
bron, and went to live in a city called Jerusalem. 

After David went to Jerusalem, he had the tabernacle 
brought to that 
city and pitched 
there. The ark 
had not been in 
the tabernacle 
for many years. 
Ever since it was 
taken into battle 
by Eli's sons, it 
had been sepa- 
rated from God's 
house. David 
thought it ought 
to be brought back, and put in its place, so he and all the peo- 
ple with him went to get it. 

The ark was put on a new cart drawn by oxen, and David 
and the people went before it, playing upon harps and making 
music. On the way the oxen stumbled, and a man whose 
name was Uzzah, put out his hand, and took hold of the ark to 
steady it. God had told the people not to touch the ark, and 
so this man died there by the ark because he was not careful 
to do as God had said. 

After this David was afraid to take the ark into the city. 
He left it at the house of a man who lived near by. It was 
kept there three months, and God blessed this family because 
of the ark. After a time David had it brought to the city 
and put in the tabernacle. 




UZZAH SLAIN. 



1-40 DAVID WISHES TO BOLD GOD A HOUSE. 

. Perhaps it seems strange to you that God should have pun- 
ished a man for steadying the ark when it was about to fall. 
But we must remember, as has been said before, that God 
means what he says. "We do not know that the ark was going 
to fall. Perhaps the Lord made it look as though it were go- 
ing to do so just to see if the people would obey him. And 
then suppose it really did start to fall, could not the Lord have 
taken care of it ? TThat do vou think about it ? 



LESSON CVI. 

DAVID WISHES TO BUILD GOD A HOUSE. 

The tabernacle was God's house. It was made after the 
pattern God had given Moses, and at one time must have been 
very beautiful. But it had been carried about in the wilder- 
ness many years, and had been in use so long that by the time 
it reached Jerusalem, it must have looked somewhat old and 
soiled. David thought the Lord ought to. have a better house, 
and he wanted to build one for him. He told the prophet 
Nathan what he would like to do, and Nathan told him to do 
as he wished, for the Lord was with him. 

But that night the Lord came to the prophet and told him 
that he did not want David to build him a house, for he had 
been a man of war. He said that David should have a son 
who would be king after him, and he should build the house. 

David did not feel hurt because God did not want him to 
do this work. He gave up the idea cheerfully, and during the 
rest of his life gathered much gold and silver and brass, and 
other useful things, and stored them away so that his son 
might have them to use in the building. The Bible says that 
David stored away for this house thousands and thousands of 
dollars' worth of gold and silver, and more brass and iron than 
could be weighed. He also had men at work hewing out 



DAVID HELPS JONATHAN'S SON. 141 

stones and getting timbers ready for the building. He seemed 
more anxious to have the Lord's house beautiful, than he was 
to have nice things himself. 

David was called the " sweet singer of Israel." He not 
only played upon the harp, but he wrote beautiful verses. 
Many of them are found in the Psalms. In his verses, David 
is always praising the Lord, and speaking of his goodness. 
Hear what he sa3*s : — 

1. I will both lay me down in peace and sleep : 
For thou, Lord, only makest me dwell in safety. 

2. The Lord is my shepherd ; I shall not want. 

3. Like as a father pitieth his children, 
So the Lord pitieth them that fear him. 

4. Sing praises to God, sing praises ; 

Sing praises unto our King, sing praises. 

Can you not learn some of these verses ? How nice it 
would be if you could always remember them ! 



LESSON CVII. 
DAVID HELPS JONATHAN'S SON. 

David always remembered his "brother Jonathan." He 
was anxious to show kindness to his lost friend, and so he be- 
gan to look around to see if he could not help his family in 
some way. 

After a time David heard that Jonathan had a son living. 
This son was only five years old when his father was killed. 
He was with his nurse at the time, and when she heard what 
had happened to Jonathan, she took the little boy, and fled to 
save his life. On the way the child fell, and was hurt, and 
from that time he was always lame in his feet. 

David sent for this son, and had him brought to his home. 
He afterward cared for him, and treated him as one of his 
own family. He also gave him all that had been Saul's, and 



142 ABSALOM. 

his father Jonathan's. In all things David showed the great- 
est kindness to this son for his father's sake. 

So far in all our study about David, we have found him to 
be a very good man. He has always obeyed the Lord, and 
the Lord has ever been willing to help him. But almost all 
good people do wrong sometimes, and so it was with David. 
The time came when he did a great wrong. 

Among the soldiers was a certain man that David wanted 
to get out of the way. He sent the man into battle, and had 
him put in the front of the fight, — in the place of greatest 
danger. David did not know that the man would be killed, 
but he hoped that he would, and he had his wish. 

The Lord sent word to David by a prophet, and told him 
that he had done a very wicked thing. Because of his wrong 
the Lord said he should have trouble in his family, and his 
youngest child should die. 

David was very sorry for what he had done, and he con- 
fessed his sin before the Lord. He prayed earnestly that God 
would spare his child, but when it died, he did not complain. 
He knew that God had not punished him more than he de- 
served. 

God forgave David his sin, and after a time gave him 
another little boy to take the place of the one who had died. 
His parents named him Solomon. He was a good child, and 
the Bible says, "God loved him." 



LESSON CVIII. 
ABSALOM. 

God told David, that because of his sin, he should have 
trouble in his family. It was not long before this came to 
pass. 

Absalom, one of David's sons, became very angry with his 
brother Amnon, because of some wrong that he had done, and 



ABSALOM. 143 

would not speak to him for two years. At the end of that 
time Absalom had one of his servants kill Amnon. As soon 
as the terrible deed was done, Absalom fled from Jerusalem, 
and for fear of his father, did not come back for three years. 

David was greatly displeased with his son, but at the end 
of the three years, he allowed him to return, although he 
would not look upon his face for two years longer. 

At last Absalom sent word to his father, pleading that he 
might see him. David then allowed his son to come to him, 
and when he saw him with his face bowed to the ground, he 
raised him up, and kissing him tenderly, forgave him his 
wrong. 

Absalom was good looking, and his ways were so pleasant 
that many of the people liked him very much. He was also 
his father's favorite, but as we shall soon see, he had a wicked 
heart. After he came back to Jerusalem, he seemed very 
good and kind. He was alwa}~s pleasant to the people, and 
tried in every way to make them think well of him. When 
men came to talk with him about any matter, he would take 
them by the hand and kiss them, and tell them how well he 
would treat them if he were only king. What he wanted was 
to be king in the place of his father, and he thought he could 
bring this about if he could get the people to think more of 
him than of his father. 

After a time Absalom went down to Hebron. He pre- 
tended to his father that he was going there to worship the 
Lord. From this city he sent out men among the people, and 
told them that when the} r heard the sound of the trumpet, to 
cry, " Absalom is king in Hebron! " Many of the people then 
joined Absalom at that city, and he soon had quite an army. 
He also had with him one of his father's servants, a very wise 
man who had always been a great help to the king. 

When David heard what Absalom was doing, he was very 
sorrowful. He knew that his son was sinning not only against 
him, but against Grod, and the poor father's heart was filled 



144 DAVID FLEES FROM ABSALOM. 

with grief. He did not dare to stay in Jerusalem, for fear 
that Absalom would come with his men, and put him to death. 
Taking his family and servants, he fled from the city, and 
several hundred soldiers went with him. David's heart was 
almost broken, and he went out of the city weeping and bare- 
foot, with his head covered. The people also wept, for many 
still loved their king ; and as he passed along with his small 
army, the people by the way wept with a loud voice. 

LESSON CIX. 
DAVID FLEES FROM ABSALOM. 

After leaving Jerusalem, David and his company fled 
toward the mountains. They had not gone far before they 
were joined by the priests carrying the ark. David did not 
like to have the ark taken from its place, and he told the 
priests to carry it back. He said that if he did right, the 
Lord would care for him, even if he was separated from the 
ark and from G-od's house. He told the priests that they 
could help him more by staying in the city, and by sending 
him word of what was going on there. 

After David left Jerusalem, Jonathan's son sent him 
beasts for his family to ride upon, and some bread and fruit 
and wine. These things were a great help to David, for he 
needed them very much. 

About this time a man came out and called David bad 
names, and threw stones at him and his servants as they were 
passing along. One of the servants wanted to kill this 
wicked man, but David said, " No ; may be the Lord has told 
him to curse me," and he would let no one do the man any 
harm. David knew that he had done wrong, and he did not 
feel like punishing those who spoke against him. 

David was in great trouble, but he knew why it came. He 
had sinned against G-od, and God was punishing him for his 



DEATH OF ABSALOM. 145 

wrong. One little boy had died, another son had been killed 
by his brother, and now David was fleeing from Absalom, the 
one he loved more than all others. All this must have been 
very hard for David to bear, but he did not complain. He 
knew that God would not punish him more than was right, so 
he left it all with God. 

Absalom came to Jerusalem as was expected, but he found 
his father gone. At first he thought he would follow after 
him, but finally he decided to wait until more of the people 
were on his side. He thought it would be better to get to- 
gether a large army, and then go with them himself, when the 
right time should come. 

Among Absalom's servants was a man who was friendly to 
David, but Absalom did not know it. As soon as this servant 
found out what Absalom was going to do, he went to the 
priests and told them to send word to David. The priests did 
so, sending two of their sons with the message. On the way 
the young men came very near getting into trouble. Absa- 
lom's soldiers saw them going away, and thinking that all was 
not right, followed after them. The } r oung men reached a 
house at last where lived a good woman, and she let them down 
into a well, and covered them up. When the soldiers came, she 
directed them another way. After all danger was past, the 
young men came from their hiding place, and went on to see 
David. 



LESSON CX. 

DEATH OF ABSALOM. 



The priest's sons finally reached David in safety. They 
told him to pass over the river Jordan quickly, for Absalom 
was soon coming with a large army. David then took his 
family and servants and all who were with him, and went 

10 



146 DEATH OF ABSALOM. 

over the river ; by daylight the next morning all were on the 
other side. David and his company then fled far away into 
the country. 

The people did not forget David while he was in the wil- 




DEATH OF ABSALOM. 



derness awaj' from his comfortable home. The}' sent him 
beds and dishes ; also flour, grain, corn, and beans ; butter and 
honey and cheese and sheep ; for they said, " The people must 
be hungry and thirst} T 'in the wilderness." 

Absalom did not wait long in Jerusalem. He soon had a 
large army, and he felt himself ready to enter into battle 
against the king. Putting himself at the head of his arm} T , 
he followed after his father beyond the Jordan, to the wilder- 
ness whither he had fled. 



DEATH OP ABSALOM. 147 

David saw that he would have to enter into battle against 
his son. It was a hard thing for him to do, but he knew that 
it must be done, or God's people would be brought into great 
trouble. 

David wished to go with his arnry, but the people would 
not let him for fear that he would get hurt. To please them, 
he stayed behind, and as his soldiers started away, he said to 
them, " Deal gently for mj r sake with the young man, even with 
Absalom." 

The battle was fought in a field, or wood, where were deep 
holes and rough places. Twenty thousand people were killed 
that day, the most of them being Absalom's men ; and more 
were killed by falling into the deep holes than were killed 
by the sword. 

Absalom's army had to turn and run at last, and he with 
them. As he was fleeing on his mule, his head caught in the 
branches of a tree, and the mule went out from under him, 
leaving him hanging to the tree. Absalom was still alive 
when the captain of David's army found him. But the cap- 
tain did not spare him. He killed him, and threw his body 
into a deep pit, and covered it over with a heap of stones. 

During the fight David stayed in a city, where he waited 
anxiously to hear from the armies. He sat at the gate, and 
had a man on the wall above, watching for some one to bring 
him word from the battle. 

At last a man came running, and when he met David, he 
told him that the Lord had fought for his army. David then 
asked anxiously, " Is Absalom safe? " The man answered, 
"May all } r our enemies be as that young man is." David 
then knew that his son was dead, and he went away and wept. 
He cried aloud, and said, " my son Absalom, my son, my 
son ! Would God I had died for thee, Absalom, my son, 
my son ! " 

When the soldiers came back from the battle, and saw how 



148 DAVID RETURNS TO JERUSALEM. 

sad they had made their king, they went away to their tents 
sorrowful. After a time David was able to hide his grief for 
the sake of the people, and he came out among them and 
talked with them. 



LESSON CXI. 
DAVID RETURNS TO JERUSALEM. 

After the battle the people of Jerusalem sent to David, 
and asked him to return. They came as far as the river Jor- 
dan to meet him. There was no bridge across the river, but 
the people had a ferry-boat there ready to take him across, with 
his family and his servants. 

Before David reached the Jordan, one of the men who had 
carried him beds and food when in the wilderness, came out 
to see him. He was an old man, eighty } T ears old. David was 
very thankful for this man's kindness, and he told him that if 
he would go home with him to Jerusalem, he would care for 
him as long as he lived. The old man did not want to do 
this. He was afraid he would be a burden to David, so he 
said he would go back to his own home, and die there, and be 
buried beside his father and mother. He went a little way with 
David, and then returned to his own place. David kissed the 
old man very tenderly, and bid him a kind good-by. 

After David had crossed the river, the man who had stoned 
him when he was leaving Jerusalem, came to him, and falling 
down before him, begged his forgiveness. Some of David's 
servants wanted to put the man to death, but David would not 
listen to them. He said to the man, "You shall not die." 

Jonathan's son also came to meet David. He was very 
glad to see his kind friend, for he had mourned for him ever 
since he had been away. 

When David first came back to Jerusalem, some of the 
people did not want him to be king. They chose another man 



DEATH OF DAVID. 149 

for their leader, and went off by themselves. They soon came 
back, however, and afterward God's people had peace and 
quiet for some time. 



LESSON CXII. 
DEATH OF DAVID. 



After a few years the Philistines again made war with the 
Israelites. David went with his army into one of the battles, 
and came very near being killed. After that the people would 
never let him go again. They were very careful of their good 
king, for they wanted him to live a long time. 

During this time of trouble with the Philistines, David sent 
men through the land to count the Israelites to see how many 
of them would make good soldiers. He seemed anxious to 
have a large army, and this looked as though he depended 
upon men for help more than upon God. Now, as we all know, 
it was God who helped David in his battles. No matter how 
few were the men in the army, they always gained in the fight, 
for the captain of God's army was with them. 

As soon as David had counted the people, he was sorry for 
what he had done. He saw that he had not acted wisely, and 
he went to the Lord, and prayed to have his sin forgiven. 

The next morning a prophet came to David, and told him 
that he must suffer for his wrong, but he said the Lord would 
give him his choice of three different punishments. He 
could choose a three years' famine, or three months to flee be- 
fore his enemies, or a plague which should last three days. 
David said he hardly knew what to do, but he thought he 
would rather fall into the hands of God than into the hands of 
his enemies ; so God sent the plague. 

The plague was all around Jerusalem, and many of the 
people died. David was in great distress when he saw the 
people suffering because of his sin, and he prayed God to 



150 SOLOMON AS KING. 

save them, and send the plague upon him and his family. The 
plague had not } T et reached Jerusalem, and when the angel 
who was destroying the people was about to enter that city, 
God told him to go no farther, "for," said he, "it is enough." 
God then told David to go to a certain place and make an of- 
fering. He did so, and the plague was taken away. 

David was now very old. He knew that he must soon die, 
so he chose his son Solomon to be king after him. He had 
the priests anoint him, and all the people cried, "God save 
king Solomon!" 

David knew that it was good to serve the Lord, and during 
his last days he spent much time with his son, telling him 
about God's goodness and love. He urged him to be a good 
man and to keep all of God's commandments, so that God 
could be with him, and help him. 

David was a man that the Lord loved. He sometimes did 
wrong, but he was always sorry for his sins, and God was will- 
ing to forgive him. David loved the Lord with all his heart. 
In his songs we hear him say, "I will love thee, Lord;" 
" The Lord is my. light ; " " Praise ye the Lord." 

And so good king David died, having been the leader of 
God's people forty years. 



LESSON CXIII. 



SOLOMON AS KING. 

Solomon was very young when he was made king, only 
about eighteen years old. He remembered the good things 
that his father had said to him, and he was very anxious to 
please the Lord. 

One night Solomon had a strange dream. The Lord came to 
him and said, " What shall I give thee ? " Solomon answered, 
"Thou, O Lord, hast made me king in the place of my father, 
and I am but a little child : I know not how to do. Give me, 



SOLOMON AS KING. 151 

therefore, wisdom that I may do right before thee and thy 
people." The Lord was much pleased with Solomon's answer, 
and said to him, " Because }*ou have asked for wisdom, and 
not for long life or riches, I will give you what 30U ask. 1 
will also give you riches, and honor, and if } t ou will keep my 
commandments as did David 3'our father, I will give you 
long life." 

When Solomon awoke and found that G-od had been talk- 
ing to him, he felt very happy and thankful. He afterward 
went to the tabernacle, and made offerings to the Lord. 

Not long after this, Solomon had a chance to show his wis- 
dom. Two women came to him with a baby. Both claimed 
the child, and they wanted him to settle the matter, and say 
whose it should be. The women lived in the same house, and 
each was the mother of a little boy. In the night one woman 
rolled on her baby and killed it. She then arose quietly and 
put her dead child in bed with the other woman, and took her 
child which was sleeping by her side. In the morning the 
mother of the living child saw what had been done, and of 
course she wanted her own baby, but the other woman would 
not give it up. She said it was hers. There was no one to prove 
which was the mother of the living child, and so the women 
went to Solomon. After hearing each woman's stoiy, Solomon 
told one of his servants to take his sword and cut the baby in 
two, and give a half to each woman. One of the women 
thought that plan a very good one, but the other cried out 
quickly, "0 my lord, give her the living child, and do not 
kill it ! " Solomon then saw to whom the child belonged. He 
knew that the woman who wanted the child killed could not 
be its mother, so he gave it to the other woman. Do n' t you 
think Solomon took a very wise way to find the true mother? 
When the people heard of it, they feared their king, for they 
saw that G-od was with him. 



152 SOLOMON BUILDS GOD'S HOUSE. 

LESSON CXIV. 

SOLOMON BUILDS GOD'S HOUSE. 

Solomon knew that he had been chosen to build God's 
house. David, his father, had told him all about it, and it 
was his wish that the building should be very grand and 
beautiful. There was now no war in Canaan, — everything 
was quiet and peaceful, and Solomon thought it a good time 
to begin his great work. 

In this building, Solomon wished to use lumber made only 
from cedars. These trees grew in a countiy north of Canaan. 
Hiram, a rich king and an old friend of David.) lived in that 
part of the land, and Solomon sent to him to buy the lumber 
for God's house. 

Hiram was very willing to help Solomon in his work, and 
sent him all the cedars he needed. He also let his servants 
help in hewing the timber and stones for the building. Hiram 
would take no pay for what he sent Solomon, nor for what 
his servants did. All that he asked was that Solomon would 
feed his servants while they were working for him. "What a 
kind, generous man Hiram must have been ! 

David, j'ou remember, stored awa}- a great amount of gold 
and silver and iron and brass for this house, but Solomon did 
not use it. After the building was finished, he took all the 
things that his father had saved, and put them among the 
treasures of the house. 

Solomon was nearly four years getting things together for 
the building. After he began to build the house, it took 
seven and a half years to finish it. Everything was made 
ready before it was brought to its place, so that no hammer 
or iron tool was heard about the house while the men were at 
work upon it. 

It took many years to build this house, and there were 



THE TEMPLE FINISHED. 153 

thousands and thousands of men working upon it all the time, 
so 3 r ou see it must have been very grand indeed. 

Solomon, of course, did not do the work himself, but he 
told others what to do, so he is said to have built the house. 
Because of this, it is generally called Solomon's temple. 



LESSON CXV. 

THE TEMPLE FINISHED. 



Solomon's temple was built on a high hill in Jerusalem. 
This hill was called a mountain, and some people think it is 
the same as that on which Abraham was going to offer Isaac 
so many 3-ears before. 

The temple had a holy and a most holy place, the same as 
the tabernacle. The outside of the building was made of 
beautiful, polished stones, and the inside was of cedar, cov- 
ered with gold. On the ceiling and the sides of the house 
were carved figures of angels and flowers and trees, all of gold. 
The floor also was covered with gold. 

In the holy place were ten golden candlesticks, and ten 
tables, and an altar overlaid with gold. 

The building had a court around it, something like the one 
around the tabernacle. In this court was a large brass altar 
and a very large brass basin. The basin rested upon twelve 
oxen, which were made of brass. It was for the use of the 
priests, and was so large that it held several hundred barrels 
of water. All these things were made by a man that Hiram 
sent to help Solomon. 

After the temple was finished, Solomon brought into it the 
rich things David had stored away for the house, and left 
.them there as treasures. He also took the ark from the tab- 
ernacle, and put it in the most holy place of the temple. 

Everything was now ready, and Solomon gathered the peo- 
ple together from all parts of Canaan that they might make 



154 THE QUEEN OF SHEBA. 

offerings, and give the house to God. When they came to- 
gether to the temple, they began to pla}- upon their instru- 
ments of music, and to sing praises to God. The Lord then 
filled the whole temple with a cloud of glory, to show that he 
was there ; and no one could stay within the building. 

Solomon then went outside, and kneeling down on a plat- 
form where all the people could see him, spread out his hands 
toward heaven, and turning his face toward the most holy 
place, prayed God to accept the house which had been made 
for him. Solomon made a very earnest prayer, and God 
answered him by sending fire from heaven upOn the great 
altar, which stood in the court. In this way God showed the 
people that he was pleased with the building which the} T had 
given him. 

After the prayer, Solomon and all the people made offer- 
ings unto the Lord. Many thousand oxen and sheep were 
offered at this time, and God was pleased with what the peo- 
ple did. 

After worshiping the Lord several days, the Israelites re- 
turned to their homes, feeling happy and thankful because of 
what God had done for them. They saw that the Lord was 
with their king, and thej T were glad. 



LESSON CXVI. 



THE QUEEN OF SHEBA. 

It was not long before God came to Solomon and talked 
with him again. He told him that he was pleased with the 
house which had been made for him, and he said he had made 
it holy. God told Solomon that if he did right, he would 
help him ; but if he and the people did wrong and worshiped 
idols like the wicked people around them, he would have to 
send them out of the land which he had given them. And 
then that building, which was so beautiful and holy, would 



THK QUEEN OF SHEBA. 



155 



become a by-word to wicked people, and as the} r passed b}-, 
they would mock at it, and hiss, and say all manner of evil 
against it. 

The people of other countries heard of Solomon and his 
wisdom and riches. Man} T came a long way to see him. 
Among them was a 
queen from a coun- 
try called Sheba. 
She had heard so 
much about the 
king that she came 
to see if it was all 
true. She had with 
her man} r servants 
and camels, and she 
brought Solomon a 
rich present of the 
spices and gold and 
costly stones fouml 
in her country. 

She had some 
hard questions to 
ask Solomon, to try 
his wisdom, but he 
answered them all. 
He then showed her 
the house he had made for the Lord, and when she saw it and 
all the king's own riches and servants, she said that the half 
had not been told her. She told Solomon that when she had 
heard about his riches and wisdom, she would not believe ; 
but now that she had seen them with her own eyes, she knew 
that he was even greater than she had heard. 

After a time the queen went back to her own land. She 
was much pleased with what she had seen, and when she went 
away, she left Solomon another rich present. 




SOLOMON AND THE QUEEN OF SHEBA. 



156 DEATH O* SOLOMON. 

LESSON CX VII. 

DEATH OF SOLOMON. 

While Solomon was young, he was good, and the Lord 
loved him. He seemed then to be modest and humble. But as 
he grew older, he became proud, and in many ways was very 
different from his father. 

David was a plain man. and did not care much for riches. 
He dressed and lived in a simple way. The most of his 
riches he saved for God's house. Solomon was not so. When 
he went out before the people, he wore a robe of purest white. 
and rode in a lovely carriage drawn by prancing horses. Serv- 
ants walked by his side, and everything around him had to be 
very grand. His own house was rich and beautiful. It took 
longer to build it than it did to build the temple. Solomon 
liked to see nice things, and it is said that silver was as 
plenty in Jerusalem as were the stones. 

Solomon had many wives, as did other kings in those 
days. Many of these women were wicked, and worshiped 
idols. After a time. Solomon began to worship idols too. He 
knew, of course, that images could not help any one : but he 
worshiped them to please his wives, and to make himself well 
thought of by the wicked people around. 

God was angry with Solomon for this. He told him that 
because of his sin. great trouble should come upon his family 
after his death. How sad to think that Solomon would do 
wickedly after the Lord had done so much for him ! He 
knew that it was God who had given him all his wisdom and 
riches, but still he turned froin him, and disobeyed him. How 
cruel this was ! and how sorry God must have been ! 

Solomon saw some of his mistakes before his death, but 
the Bible does not say that he died a good man. We will 
hope that he did, and that he, and we too, will some day live 



god's people separate. 157 

in mansions much more beautiful than auj T thing he ever 
made. When Solomon died, he was buried in Jerusalem by 
the side of his father. 

Solomon was a poet, like his father, and he wrote some 
very wise things. Some of his verses were written for chil- 
dren as well as for older people. Hear what he says : — 

1. Remember now thy Creator in the days of thy youth. 

2. The eyes of the Lord are in every place, 
Beholding the evil and the good. 

3. The Lord is far from the wicked, 

But he heareth the prayer of the righteous. 

4. He that hath pity upon the poor, lendeth unto the Lord. 

5. He that is slow to anger, is better than the mighty. 

6. He that uttereth lies shall perish. 

7. An high look and a proud heart is sin. 

8. Pleasant words are as an honey-comb, 
Sweet to the soul, and health to the bones. 

9. A soft answer turneth away wrath. 

10. A merry heart doeth good like a medicine. 

11. A good name is rather to be chosen than great riches. 

12. Even a child is known by his doings. 

How many of you will remember these good words, and 
think of them every day ? 



LESSON CXVIII. 

GOD'S PEOPLE SEPARATE. 

Clod had told Solomon that trouble should come upon his 
family after his death. He kept his word, and the trouble was 
this : After Solomon died, his son was made king in his place. 
A part of the people did not want him for their king, because 
he would not do as they wished ; so they chose another man 
for their king, and went off by themselves. These people 
afterward called themselves the children of Israel, while those 
that stayed with Solomon's son went by the name of the chil- 
dren of Judah. Most of the people went with the other king, 



158 ELIJAH THE PROPHET. 

but the children of Judah had Jerusalem for one of their 
cities, so they had God's house and the ark with them. 

God's people had always come to Jerusalem several times 
a year to worship ; but after they separated, the children of 
Israel would not come any more, because Jerusalem belonged 
to the children of Judah. The king of the children of Israel 
then made idols for his people, and they worshiped them. 
After this the} r had many different kings, but all were wicked, 
and so the people were wicked too. 

God sent prophets to his people, and tried to have them do 
right, but they would not listen to their words. After a time 
God let some wicked people come and take them out of their 
land. The} T then became servants to their enemies. A very 
few of the children of Israel still feared the Lord, and after 
many years they came back to Jerusalem. Of the others we 
know very little. They became so wicked that God no longer 
called them his people. 

Solomon's son and the children of Judah began to wor- 
ship idols too ; but after a time the king died, and then the 
people had a good king, who would not let them do so wick- 
edly. He destroyed the idols, and taught the people to wor- 
ship the true God. 

The children of Judah had some wicked kings, but they 
also had some good ones. The wicked kings led the people 
to do evil, and the good ones helped them to do right. 

By and by we will learn more about these kings. 



LESSON CXIX. 

ELIJAH THE PROPHET. 
We will now study about one of God's prophets. His name 
was Elijah. At the time he lived, the children of Israel were 
still in Canaan, and their king was then a very wickecl man 
named Ahab. 



ELIJAH THE PROPHET. 



159 



Elijah told this king that because of his wickedness there 
should be no rain nor dew. This meant, of course, that there 
would be a famine in the land, for things cannot grow without 
water. 

Ahab was very angiy with Elijah, and wished to kill him, 
but God sent his prophet to the wilderness, and there cared for 
him. Elijah hid by a little brook, and stayed there for somo 




ELIJAH FED BY RAVENS. 



time. He had plenty of water, and Grod sent ravens to feed 
him. Every morning and evening the birds brought him food. 
After a time the brook became dry because there was no rain, 
and G-od told Elijah to go to a certain city where lived a poor 
widow who would feed him. 

When Elijah came near the city, he saw a woman out gath- 
ering sticks to make a fire. He asked her to bring him a little 
water and some bread. The woman said she had no bread, 
only a handful of meal and a little oil. She said that she was 
getting ready then to cook the meal for herself and son, and 



160 THE WICKED PROPHETS. 

she expected they would then have to die, for that was all 
the}' had to eat. Elijah told her to fear not, but to go and 
make him a little cake out of the meal, and afterward to make 
for herself and her son. He told her that Gk>d had said the 
meal and the oil should not grow less, but that she should 
have plenty until rain should again be sent upon the earth. 
The woman did as the prophet said, and both he and her 
family had plenty for many days. 

Not long after Elijah came to the widow's home, her son 
was taken sick and died. When the woman told the prophet 
that her son was dead, he said, " Give me your son," and he 
took the boy to his room, and laid him on the bed. He then 
prayed that Grod would bring the child to life, and his prayer 
was answered. Elijah afterward carried the boy to his mother, 
alive and well. Oh, how glad the poor widow was! She could 
not be thankful enough for what Gk)d had done for her, and 
she told Elijah that she knew now that he was a man of G-od. 



LESSON CXX. 
THE WICKED PROPHETS. 

Elijah said that because of Ahab's wickedness, no rain nor 
clew should fall upon the land. The prophet's word came true, 
and there was no rain nor dew for over three years. At the 
end of that time Grod came to Elijah, and told him to go to the 
king, for rain should be sent. 

Ahab's wife was very wicked, as well as her husband. She 
had put to death all the prophets of GJ-od except a few who were 
hidden in a cave by one of the king's servants. This servant 
was a good man, and he cared for the prophets, and carried 
them bread and water. Ahab wished to kill Elijah too, but he 
could not find him. If Elijah had been like some people, he 
would have been afraid to go back to the king, but he knew 
that it was the Lord who sent him, so he did not fear. 



THE WICKED PROPHETS. 161 

On his way to see Ahab, Elijah met this same good servant 
who had saved the prophets, and told him to go and tell his 
master that Elijah was coming. When Ahab met Elijah, he 
said, "Art thou he that troubleth Israel?" Because the 
prophet had said that the famine should come, Ahab tried to 
make it appear that he was the cause of it, and so he asked 
this question. Elijah answered, " I have not troubled Israel, 
but you and your family have done so because of your sins." 

In those da} T s there were wicked men who called them- 
selves prophets. They worshiped idols, and pretended to talk 
with them as true prophets did with G-od. Ahab had not killed 
these wicked men, but kept them near him, and treated them 
as though they were very holy. When Elijah came to Ahab, 
he told him to bring his prophets to a certain place. They 
came together, and all the people stood around to see what 
was going to be done. Elijah then said, " If the Lord be God 
serve him, and if Baal be Gk>d, serve him." Baal was the 
name of the image that the people then worshiped. Elijah 
told the prophets to make ready an offering for their god, and 
to put no fire under it, and he would do the same for his Grod. 
He said that the true G-od would send down fire, and burn the 
offering. 

The prophets made ready their offering, and began to pray 
for the fire to come down on the altar. All that forenoon they 
called upon their god, but no fire came ; and they jumped up 
and down, crying, " Hear us, Baal ! " But Baal did not 
hear, and Elijah began to make sport of their god. He told 
the prophets to cry louder. He said that may be their god was 
asleep, or had gone on a journey, or was talking, and so did not 
hear them. The men then cried aloud, and cut themselves 
with knives until the blood came, hoping that Baal would feel 
sorry for them and hear them. 

Toward eA^ening Elijah built his altar. He had all the 

people come near, and then he poured over the altar twelve 

11 



162 ELIJAH FED BY AN ANGEL. 

barrels of water. He did this to show the people that there 
could be no fire there. He then prayed God to send fire to 
show that he was the only true G-od. Fire from heaven then 
came down upon the altar, and burned up the offering and the 
wood and the stones, and even the water that stood around. 
When the people saw this, they fell upon their faces, and cried, 
« Surely the Lord, he is G-od ! " 

Elijah then told the people to take the wicked prophets 
and destroy them, and they did so. 



LESSON CXXL 

ELIJAH FED BY AN ANGEL. 

After the wicked prophets were destroyed, Ahab seemed 
to be afraid of Elijah. The prophet had no one with him 
but his servant, but still the king did not dare to harm him. 

Elijah told Ahab that the Lord was now going to send rain 
upon the land. There were then no signs of a storm ; the sky 
was clear, and everything was as it had been, but Elijah knew 
that the rain would surely come, for the Lord had said so. 

The prophet left the king, and went up on the top of a 
mountain near by. He there knelt down, and praj-ed that 
G-od would send the rain. Elijah's servant was with him, and 
he told him to go and look toward the sea. The servant came 
back, and said he saw nothing. Seven times Elijah sent him 
to look, and the last time he said he saw a small cloud about 
the size of a man's hand. Elijah then told his servant to go 
and tell Ahab to get to his home quickly, or the rain would 
stop him. The sky soon began to look black, and there was a 
very heavy rain. Ahab rode in his carriage, and Elijah went 
before him on foot until the} 7 came to Ahab's house. 

When Ahab's wife heard what had been done to the wicked 
prophets, she said that before another day passed, Elijah 
should be killed too. Elijah heard of this, and fled to the 



ELIJAH TAKEN TO HEAVEN. 163 

woods. He there lay down and went to sleep nnder a tree. 
An angel awoke him and said, "Arise and eat." He looked, 
and saw by his side, bread and oil, and he ate. He then lay 
down again, for he was weak and weary. By and by the angel 
awoke him a second time, and told him to eat. He did so, 
and then had no more food for forty days and forty nights. 

After resting awhile, Elijah went on his way, and came to 
a cave. In this he lived for some time. The Lord came to 
him and asked him what he was doing there. Elijah said that 
the people of Israel had become very wicked, and had killed 
many of the true prophets, and now they wanted to kill him. 
The Lord told him to go back, and anoint a certain man king 
of the children of Israel. He also told him to anoint a man 
named Elisha to be a prophet. 

Elijah did as the Lord had said, and went to see Elisha. 



LESSON CXXII. 
ELIJAH TAKEN TO HEAVEN. 

Elisha was a farmer, and lived with his parents at home. 
When Elijah came to see him, he was in the field, plowing with 
his oxen. 

When Elisha heard what the Lord wanted of him, he was 
willing to go. He killed his oxen, and offered them to the 
Lord. He then went to the house, and kissing his father and 
mother good-by, went away with Elijah. 

The two prophets traveled around together for some time. 
They went to Ahab and to others of the people to whom the 
Lord sent them. 

After a time the prophets began to think that Elijah was 
soon to be taken from them. It may be that Elijah had said 
something which had made them think so, or perhaps the Lord 
had made it known to them in some way. Elisha seemed to 



164 



ELIJAH TAKEN TO HEAVEN. 



know about it too, and one day when some of the prophets 
asked him if he knew that his master was soon to leave him, 
he answered, "Yes, I know it; hold jour peace." 

Elijah wanted to go off by himself and stay alone, but 
Elisha would not leave him, for he wished to be with his friend 
as long as he could. 

One clay as they were going along, they came to the river 
Jordan. There was no bridge across the river at this place, 




ELIJAH TAKEN TO HEAVEN. 



so Elijah took his cloak, and struck the water, and it divided. 
The men then werrt over on dry land. 

After crossing the Jordan, Elijah said to his friend, "What 
shall I do for you before I am taken away ?" Elisha answered, 
"Let me have twice as much of God's help as you have." 
Elijah then said, " You have asked a hard thing, but if you see 
me when I am taken away, it shall be as you wish." 

It came to pass as they went on talking by the way that 
there came between them a chariot and horses, which looked 
like fire. Elisha then saw Elijah in the chariot going up to 



CHILDREN MOCK ELISHA. 165 

heaven in a whirlwind. Elisha cried after his friend, but he 
was soon far out of sight, his cloak falling to the ground as he 
went awa}\ Elisha picked up the cloak, and taking it with 
him, went back alone. 

Elijah must have been a very good man, or the Lord would 
not have cared for him as he did. He sent birds to feed him, 
and then he sent angels. He helped him to bring the dead to 
life, and to divide the Jordan, and last of all, took him to heaven 
without his having to die. How wonderful all this seems ! 
Would you not like to have the Lord love you as he did 
Elijah ? He will, if }'0u are as good as Elijah was. 

Do you remember the name of any other man who went to 
heaven without dying ? 



LESSON CXXIIL 

CHILDREN MOCK ELISHA. 

After Elijah was taken away, Elisha went back to the 
Jordan. He had asked to have Grod with him as he was with 
Elijah, and Grod gave him what he wished. 

When Elisha came to the river Jordan, he struck the 
water with Elijah's cloak, and the waters divided as before. 
He then passed over to the other side. When the people 
heard of this, they knew that the Lord was with Elisha, and 
they came out to meet him, and bowed themselves to the 
ground. 

Although the prophets knew that Elijah was going to 
be taken from them, still they did not seem to know where he 
was going. When they met Elisha, and heard that his master 
had been taken up from the earth into the clouds, they thought 
that perhaps the Lord had carried him off to some mountain, 
so they sent fifty men to search for him. Elisha knew that 
his master had gone to heaven, and so he told the people not 
to look for him ; but they would not listen, and spent three days 
searching for him. 



166 



CHILDREN MOCK ELISHA. 



Elisha was now at Jericho, the city God had destroyed 
when the Israelites first entered Canaan. The people came to 
Elisha saving that they had a pleasant city, but that the water 
was bad and the ground poor. Elisha called for some salt. 




THE WICKED CHILDREN DESTROYED. 



It was given him, and he put it in the wells, and both the 
water and the ground were made good. 

Elisha then left Jericho. On his way through the coun- 
try, some children came out of a city and began to mock him. 
They said, t: Go up, thou bald head ! go up, thou bald head ! " 
Elisha turned, and looking at the children, called upon God 
to punish them for their wickedness. The Lord answered 
Elisha, and sent out of the woods near by. two large bears, 
which killed forty-two of the children. 



THE WONDERFUL WORKS OF ELISHA. 167 

We see by what God did at this time that it must be very 
wicked indeed to mock, or make fun of, good people. If 
those children had not been doing a great wrong, God would 
not have punished them so severely. Do you ever see chil- 
dren nowadays making sport of good people who may be old 
and lame, or appear strange in some way? No doubt you 
have. But some of the boys and girls who do so, may not 
know how wicked it is. Could you not help them in some 
way, and show them how to do better ? Perhaps they have 
never heard about the children who mocked Elisha. If 
you would tell them how displeased God was at that time, it 
might help them to be more careful. 



LESSON CXXIV. 
THE WONDERFUL WORKS OF ELISHA. 

Elisha was a good man, and the Lord helped him to do 
some wonderful things. You remember that he asked to have 
more of God's help than even Elijah had. It seems that God 
gave him what he wished, for he was able to do great wonders, 
— more than the good prophet Elijah ever did. 

At one time God's people were camping in a certain part 
of the country, where they were going to have a battle. There 
was no water near, and the soldiers suffered on account of 
thirst. Elisha told them to dig some deep ditches through 
the land. They did so, and the next morning the ditches 
were filled with water, although there had been no rain. 

Not long after this, a poor woman came to Elisha in great 
trouble. She said that her husband was dead, and that a 
certain man to whom she owed a debt was going to take her 
two sons for his pay. Elisha asked the woman what she had 
in the house. She said, "Nothing, but a little oil." The 
prophet told her to go to her neighbors and borrow many 
large bowls, or dishes, and to. pour the oil into the dishes 



168 



ELISHA RAISES THE DEAD. 



until all were filled. The woman did as Elisha said, and 
from the little oil that she had, the Lord made much more. 
The woman then asked Elisha what she should do with the 
oil. He told her to sell it, and pay her debt, and to keep 
what was left for herself and her children. 

How thankful the poor woman must have felt for Elisha' s 
kindness and for G-od's help ! If the prophet had turned her 
away, no doubt her sons would have been taken from her, and 
she would have been left alone and poor, with no one to care 
for her. 

At another time, Elisha and some other prophets were 
building a house on the bank of the Jordan. While at work, 
one man's ax fell into the water. Of course it sank to the 
bottom at once, and the man could not get it. He did not 
know what to do, and was very sorry, for the ax was borrowed. 
Elisha then cut a stick, and throwing it into the water, the 
ax came to the top and floated like wood, and the man was 
able to get it. 

In our next lesson, we will learn more about this good 
prophet. 

LESSON CXXV. 
ELISHA RAISES THE DEAD. 

In his travels about the countiy, Elisha often passed a 
certain man's house. This man and his wife were good peo- 
ple, and although not acquainted with Elisha, they alwa}~s 
asked him to stop and eat with them. 

After a time the .woman told her husband that she be- 
lieved the stranger must be a man of God. She proposed that 
they fix up a little room, and let him have it for his own, so 
that he could go in and rest at anj T time. The husband 
agreed to this, so they made the room ready, and put in it a 
bed, a chair, a table, and a candlestick ; and the place looked 
very cozy indeed. 



ELISHA RAISES THE DEAL). 



1G9 



The next time Elisha and his servant came along, they 
were shown to their room, and the prophet lay down to rest. 
Elisha told his servant to go and say to the woman that she 
had been very kind to them, and he would now like to know 
if they could not do something for her. She would not say 
that she needed anything, but Elisha saw that she had no 
children, so he told her that by and b} T God would give her a 
little boy. After a time, God sent the child, and the mother 
loved him dearly. Nothing could have been given her that 
would have pleased her 
more. 

After the child had 
grown to be quite a large 
boy, he went one da} T into 
the field to see his father 
and the men reaping the 
grain. All at once he be- 
gan to feel very sick, and 
he cried, " IVly head, my 
head!" The father had 
him taken home, and when the mother saw her child, she 
knew that he was very ill. She held him on her lap, and 
cared for him tenderly, but at noon he died. 

When the woman saw that her child was dead, she took 
him to Elisha' s room and laid him on the bed. She then 
called her husband, and asked him to let her have one of the 
servants, for she wanted to go and see Elisha. It seems that 
she did not tell her husband that the child was dead, and 
he thought it very strange that she should want to go to 
the prophet just then ; but he let her do as she wished, and 
she went on her errand. When she came to Elisha, she told 
him her trouble. She seemed to think that he could help her 
in some way. Elisha said to his servant, " Take my staff, and 
go and lay it upon the face of the child." But the woman 




ELISHA RAISES THE DEAD. 



170 NAAMAN THE LEPER. 

wanted Elisha to go too, so he went back with her. The 
servant went on ahead, and put the staff on the face of the 
child, but no change took place. When Elisha came to the 
house, he went to his room, and shut himself in with the child 
alone. 

After a time he called for the mother, and when she en- 
tered the room, she found her child alive and well. 



LESSON CXXVI. 

NAAMAN THE LEPER. 

In a country not far from Canaan lived a man called 
Naaman. He was a great soldier, but he had the leprosy, — -a 
disease which none of the doctors could cure. People having 
this trouble were called lepers. 

There are persons who have the leprosy nowadays, but 
they are not allowed to live with other people. The disease 
is so terrible, and people have become so afraid of it, that 
lepers are generally sent to live by themselves in some lonely 
place, or in some building used by them alone. 

Naaman was a leper, but he was allowed to stay with other 
people, and was' well enough to go into battle. At one time 
when fighting with the Israelites, he took a little girl captive, 
and carried her home to wait on his wife. This child was one 
of God's people, and she had often heard of Elisha. When 
she saw how her master was troubled, she told her mistress 
that she wished he could see the prophet of her country, for 
he could cure the leprosy. 

Some one told Naaman what the little maid had said, and 
he thought he would go to see the prophet. When Elisha 
saw Naaman, he told him to wash in the river Jordan seven 
times. Naaman did not see how that could help him, so 
he became angry and started away in a rage. He had sup- 
posed that Elisha would put his hand on him, and call 



DEATH OF ELISHA. 171 

upon Gk)d to heal him, and he was much disappointed. He 
said that the Jordan was no better than the rivers in his own 
country, and he could wash there if that was all that was 
needed. Naaman's servants who were with him wanted him 
to obey Elisha. They said, " If the prophet had commanded 
you to do some great thing, you would have done it ; and why 
not, then, do this simple act ? " 

Naaman at last made up his mind to do as the prophet had 
said, and when he had washed in the river seven times, he 
was made well. He then went to Elisha, and told him that 
he knew now that there was no god but his God. He wanted 
to pay Elisha, but the prophet would not take anything. 
Naaman then went back to his home. 

Elisha's servant knew that his master had taken no pay 
from Naaman, and he thought he would follow after the man, 
and take something for himself. When he overtook Naaman, 
he told him that Elisha had sent him to say that two }'oung 
men had come to him, the sons of prophets, and he might give 
them something if he wished. Naaman very gladly gave to 
the servant even more than he asked, and then he went on his 
way again. 

When the servant came back, Elisha asked him where he 
had been. He said he had not been away. Elisha then told 
him that he knew what he had done ; and he said that because 
of his sin, Naaman's disease should come upon him. It was 
as the prophet had said, and before the servant left the room 
he was leprous, white as snow. 



LESSON CXXVII. 

DEATH OF ELISHA. 

Naaman returned to his home healed of the leprosy. The 
people of his country saw him, and wondered. They did not 



172 DEATH OF ELISHA. 

believe in the true God ; but when they heard what had been 
done to Naaman, they feared Elisha because of his wonderful 
works. 

After a time the king of Naaman's country made war with 
the children of Israel. He was not able to harm them, and 
he thought Elisha must be the one who was helping them. 
This king was a wicked man, and he determined to kill the 
prophet, and so get him out of the way. 

Elisha and his servant were then in a certain city, and the 
king sent a large army, with chariots and horses, to surround 
the city at night. Early in the morning, Elisha's servant saw 
the army, and he was afraid, and cried out, " What shall we 
do ? " Elisha answered, " Fear not, for they that are with us 
are more than they who are with them." Elisha then prayed 
that God would let the servant see who were there to help 
him. God answered the prophet's prayer, and the young 
man saw around his master a great army of angels, with 
horses and chariots of fire. 

When the wicked soldiers came to take Elisha, the Lord 
made them blind, and the}^ could not tell who was the prophet. 
Elisha told them to follow him, and he would take them to 
the man they wanted, and he led them into the camp of the 
children of Israel. The Lord then opened their eyes, and 
they saw themselves surrounded by their enemies. The king 
of God's people asked Elisha if he should kill his enemies. 
Elisha said, "No, but give them something to eat and drink, 
and send them back to their king." The soldiers then re- 
turned to their own land, and troubled the children of Israel 
no more. 

Elisha lived several years after this, and did many wonder- 
ful things. God did not take him to heaven alive, but he was 
with him all through his life. Even after Elisha died, God 
was with him. The body of a dead man was once put in the 
same tomb with Elisha. As soon as it touched the body of 



THE PROPHET JONAH. 



173 



the prophet, it became alive, and the man stood up on his 
feet. What wonderful things God can do ! and what great 
things he will let his children do, if they will only obey him ! 



LESSON CXXVIII. 
THE PROPHET JONAH. 

After the time of Elisha, there was a prophet in Canaan 
named Jonah. God came to this prophet, and told him to 
go to a city called 
Nineveh, and tell 
the people there that 
their city was going 
to be destined be- 
cause of their great 
wickedness. 

Nineveh was 
hundreds of miles 
from Canaan, and it 
was a very great 
city. The king of 
this people was also 
a great man, and 
Jonah did not want 
to take him the word 
which the Lord had 
sent. He thought 
he would get away 
from his unpleasant 
duty by going far 
away to another 
country. He went to a place by the sea, and there he found 
a ship that was soon to sail. He paid his fare on the boat, 
and in a short time was going farther and farther from Nineveh 
every hour. 




JONAH CAST INTO THE SEA. 



174 JONAH GOES TO NIXEYEH. 

After the ship was far out at sea, the Lord sent a fearful 
storm. The boat was tossed about by the wind and the waves, 
and the sailors thought it would surely be broken in pieces. 
They threw things overboard to lighten the ship, and then 
they began to call upon their gods for help. 

While all this noise was going on, Jonah was in another 
part of the ship fast asleep. The master of the vessel went 
to him, and told him to get up and call upon his God, for per- 
haps the Lord would hear him, and would save them, so they 
need not perish. But the storm still increased in fury, and 
the sailors began to think that some one of their number had 
done something to displease his god. They rather thought 
that Jonah might be the one, so they asked him who he was, 
and from what place he had come. Jonah told them, and he 
also let them know why he was fleeing from his own land. The 
sailors then thought that he must be the cause of the storm, 
and they asked him what they should do with him. Jonah 
told them to throw him into the sea, for he knew, he said, that 
he was the cause of the tempest. 

The sailors did not wish to harm the stranger, and they 
worked very hard to bring the ship to land, but they could 
not. They then prayed God to forgive them, and taking 
Jonah, they cast him into the angry waves. The storm at 
once ceased, and the sea became calm. The sailors then 
feared the true God, whom Jonah worshiped, and made offer- 
ings to him. 

LESSON CXXIX. 
JONAH GOES TO NINEVEH. 
After Jonah was thrown into the sea, he was swallowed by 
a great fish. The fish was sent by God, who cared for the 
prophet, and kept him alive in this strange place. Jonah had 
sinned, but God did not want him to die, and so he took this 
way to save him. 



JONAH GOES TO NINEVEH. 175 

Jonah did not have a very pleasant time while tossed 
about in the sea. He said the waves passed over him, and 
he went down to the bottom of the mountains, and the weeds 
were wrapped about his head. Besides this, Jonah felt very 
sinful and guilty. He knew that he had disobeyed the Lord, 
and he did not know what was to become of him. He was 
truly sorry for his wrong, and he praj T ed earnestty, and cried 
to God for help. 

After Jonah had been in the sea three clays and three 
nights, the Lord spoke to the fish, and it cast the prophet 
out on dry land. The Lord then came to him, and told him to 
do what he had commanded him at the first. Jonah obeyed 
this time, and he was soon on his way with G-od's message. 

When he came to Nineveh, he cried, " Yet forty days, and 
this city shall be destroyed ! " The people believed that God 
had sent them this word, and they began to repent and to do 
better. The king told his people to neither eat nor drink nor 
allow their cattle to do so, but to pray to God and to leave off 
their sins, for it might be that G-od would spare them. The 
king himself came down from his throne, and taking off his 
rich robe, put on sackcloth and sat in ashes. 

God saw that the people of Nineveh were really sorry for 
their wickedness, and he said he would spare them. 

When Jonah learned that the city was not to be destroyed, 
he was angry. He feared that people would call him a false 
prophet, and perhaps make sport of him because the city was 
not destroyed as he had said it would be, and he asked the 
Lord to let him die. G-od asked him if he did well to be 
angry. Jonah then went out of the cit} r , and sat down alone. 
The Lord came to him there and talked with him, and told 
him that he ought to be glad that the city could be spared, 
and all the people and cattle. 

We see that God is very willing to forgive people when the}^ 
are truly sorry for their sins. 



176 KING HEZEKIAH. 

LESSON CXXX. 

KING HEZEKIAH. 

You have been studying about the prophets for some time; 
perhaps you would now like to hear about good King Heze- 
kiah He was one of the children of Judah, and when he 
became king, he taught the people to do right. He destroyed 
the idols that had been set up, and feared the Lord as did 
David. The Bible says that among all the kings of Judah 
there were none as good as he. 

When Hezekiah was about fort}'- years old, he had a very 
severe sickness. The prophet Isaiah came to him, and told 
him to put things in order, for the Lord had said that he should 
die. Now Hezekiah was not willing to die yet. He was still 
quite young, and the children of Judah were at that time hav- 
ing trouble with some wicked people of another country, and 
he wished to live to help them. "When the king heard what 
the prophet said, he was very sad, and turning his face to the 
wall, he wept and prayed. 

After giving the message to the king, Isaiah turned and 
went out, but before he left the house, the Lord came to 
him and said, " G-o back to Hezekiah and tell him, ' Thus saith 
the Lord, I have heard thy prayer, I have seen thy tears, and 
I will heal thee. In three days thou shalt go up to the house 
of the Lord, and I will add fifteen years to thy life.' " The 
prophet's words came to pass, and at the end of three days, 
Hezekiah was well. 

The people of other countries heard of Hezekiah' s sickness, 
and one king sent his servants with a present to Hezekiah. 
This king lived a great way from Canaan, in a city called Bab- 
ylon. This city was built where the tower of Babel once stood. 
You remember about that, do } t ou not ? Babylon was a great 
city, and very rich, and Hezekiah was pleased to receive the 



HEZEKTAH IN TROUBLE. ft"7 

king's messengers. He showed them his treasures, and Solo- 
mon's temple, and all the riches of Jerusalem. 

After the men went away, Isaiah came to Hezekiah, and 
asked him who the men were that had been to visit him. 
Hezekiah told him who the}' were, and then Isaiah wanted to 
know what the}" had seen in Jerusalem. Hezekiah said they 
had seen all of his treasures and everything in his house. The 
prophet then told him that the time would come when all his 
treasures would be carried away to Babylon, and his sons 
would become servants to the king of that countiy. 

Hezekiah had acted very foolishly in showing his treasures 
and the treasures of God's house to the strangers. Of course 
they would envy him his riches, and their king would be 
likely to make war with the people of Judah, and carry 
away their treasures if possible. G-od said that this trouble 
would come, but he promised that it should not be while Hez- 
ekiah lived. 

Perhaps it would have been better had Hezekiah died when 
he was so sick. He would then have been saved much 
trouble, and would not have made this mistake. It is not 
right to urge the Lord for what we may think is best. He 
knows what is for our good, and we should not complain at 
anything he ma}' bring upon us. 



LESSON CXXXI. 

HEZEKIAH IN TROUBLE. 



The children of Israel, you remember, were carried away 
from Canaan by some wicked people whom the Lord sent to 
punish them. After Hezekiah had been king several years, 
the king of this same people sent word to the children of 
Judah that he was coming to take them from their land too, 
unless they would promise to obey him. He sent servants to 
them, saying, "Let not Hezekiah deceive you, for he shall not 

12 



178 



HEZEKIAH IN TROUBLE. 



be able to save you out of my hand. Neither let him make 
you trust in the Lord. No god has been able to stand against 
me. Your God could not save the children of Israel, neither 
will he be able to save you." And so this wicked king 
boasted, and set himself up against the God of heaven. He 
made the people very fair promises if they would obey him 
without any further trouble ; but if they would not obey, he 
said he would destroy Jerusalem, and make them his serv- 
ants. The king's servant 
gave this message in the 
street, in a loud voice, so 
that all the people could 
hear him ; but they an- 
swered him not a word. 

When Hezekiah heard of 
the king's message, he was 
greatly troubled. He cov- 
ered himself with sackcloth, 
and went into G-od's house. 
He sent some men to the 
prophet Isaiah to see what 
mourning in sackcloth. word he might have for 

them. The prophet told them to say to Hezekiah, "Thus 
saith the Lord, ' Be not afraid of the words which thou hast 
heard. The king has spoken against me, and I will destroy 
him in his own land.' " 

In a short time, Hezekiah received a letter from the king. 
He talked against the true God the same as at first, so Heze- 
kiah took the letter, and going to the temple, spread it out 
before the Lord. He then prayed that God would save his 
people, and show this wicked king that their God was the 
true God. Soon afterward, Isaiah came to Hezekiah, and told 
him that the Lord had heard his prayer. He said that God 
would care for Jerusalem, and the wicked king should not 
come into the city, nor shoot a single arrow there. 




JERUSALEM DESTROYED. 179 

The king and his large army were then not far from Jeru- 
salem, but. that night the Lord sent an angel to destroy 
them. The king was spared, but he could do nothing against 
Jerusalem, so he went back to his own place, and dwelt in 
Nineveh. After a time he was killed while in a temple wor- 
shiping one of his gods. 

After this trouble, Hezekiah had peace until the time of 
his death. His life was lengthened fifteen years, as the Lord 
had promised, and when he died, he was buried in Jerusalem. 



LESSON CXXXII, 



JERUSALEM DESTROYED. 

After the time of Hezekiah, many of the kings of Judah 
were wicked men. They worshiped idols, and led the people 
away from the true God. 

Grod sent his prophets to warn the people against their 
evil ways, and to show them how to do right, but they would 
not listen. They even misused Grod's messengers, and mocked 
them. 

One prophet, named Jeremiah, they treated most shame- 
fully. He always talked to the people very plainly about 
their sins. He told them that if they did not do better, their 
city would be taken by the king of Babylon. This made the 
people very angr} T , and they were ready to kill Jeremiah. 
The Lord would not let them do this then, so they put the 
prophet in prison, and let him down with ropes into a dark, 
muddy dungeon that was in the javd of the prison. Probably 
Jeremiah would have perished in this place had not a good 
man come and taken him out. It is not certain how Jeremiah 
died, but some say that he was finally put to death by the 
people of Jerusalem. 

G-od did not wish to bring trouble upon his people, but 



180 JERUSALEM DESTROYED. 

there was no other wa}' to do. They would not obey him, 
and they became so wicked that he could no longer care for 
them. 

The king of Babylon then came upon them, and earned 
them away to his land. He also took away the gold and 
silver, and the holy vessels from Solomon's temple. Jerusa- 
lem had a high wall around it. This was destroyed, and the 
city, with the temple and all the other beautiful buildings, was 
burned with fire. Some of the people were killed, and a few 
left in the city, but most of them were taken to Babylon. 

Do n*t you remember that G-od told Solomon that if he and 
his people did not do right, the day would come when wicked 
people would pass by the temple and hiss at it ? This had 
now come to pass, and as people passed by the blackened walls, 
they mocked, and spoke against the true G-od. 

How sad it makes us feel to read about these terrible 
troubles ! Jerusalem had been a great city, the home of 
David, and the place where God's house was built. There 
God's people used to meet several times a year to worship 
him. The smoke of the offerings could be seen rising toward 
heaven, and songs of praise filled the air. Xow all was 
changed. The people were gone, and the city left in ruins. 

How much happier the people would have been had they 
obeyed the Lord ! It was very hard for them to leave their 
city, and when they came to Babylon, the}* sat down by the 
rivers and wept. They hung their harps upon the willows, 
and when the people of Babylon asked them to sing some of 
the songs of Jerusalem, they answered, - : How can we sing the 
Lord's songs in a strange land?' r They said they should 
never forget Jerusalem, and they never did. 



DANIEL BEFORE THE KING. 181 

LESSON CXXXIII. 

DANIEL BEFORE THE KING. 

The king of Babylon was thought to be a great man, 
and he had a very long name. It was Nebuchadnezzar. Do 
you think you can remember it ? Perhaps you can learn to 
spell it. This king worshiped idols, but in some things he 
seemed to be quite a good man. We do not read of his abus- 
ing Grod's people very often, and many of them he treated 
well. 

Among the children of Judah were some very wise men. 
The king knew this, and he wanted their help in Babylon. 
They did not understand the language used in that country, 
and as they could not be of much use to the king until they 
did, he sent one of his servants to choose from among the 
people some of the wisest of them, that he might have them 
taught the learning and the language of Babylon. The king 
told his servant to choose young men, and only those who were 
nice looking, and good scholars in their own language. He 
said that the young men should eat of his food, and have wine 
to drink, and in every way receive the best of care for three 
years. At the end of that time he wished to choose from 
among them those who were best fitted to help him in his 
palace. 

Among those chosen, were a young man named Daniel and 
three others about his age. These young men were good as 
well as wise, and they feared the true God. When they found 
that they were to eat food such as the king ate, they were 
troubled, for the people of Babylon ate things that Grod had 
told his people not to eat. Daniel would not disobey the 
Lord, so he asked the man who had charge of them to give 
him and his companions simply pulse and water. The man 
did not want to do this. He feared that the young men would 
not do well on such simple food, and then the king would be 



182 GOD HEARS DANIEL' S PRAYER. 

angry with him. Daniel asked him to try them for ten days, 
and give them what they wished. If at the end of that time 
they were poorer in flesh or in any way worse looking than 
the others, Daniel promised that they would say no more. 
The king's servant had learned to love Daniel and his friends ; 
and to please them, he gave them what they wished. 

At the end of the ten days, the servant saw that the young 
men were fairer and fatter in flesh than those who had eaten 
of the king's food, so he let them have pulse and water instead 
of the rich food and wine. 

During the three years that Daniel and his companions 
were studying in Babylon, God was with them. He helped 
them to learn their lessons, and made them very wise. He 
also made Daniel to understand visions and dreams. At the 
end of the three years all the young men who had been under 
the king's care were brought before him, and he asked them 
questions to see how much they had learned. He saw that 
Daniel and his friends were the best of them all. He found 
them very wise, — even ten times better than the wisest men 
in Babylon. Nebuchadnezzar seemed much pleased with the 
four young men, so he made them his most honored servants, 
and kept them with him. 



LESSON CXXXIV. 

GOD HEARS DANIEL'S PRAYER. 

After a time, Nebuchadnezzar had a very strange dream. 
When he awoke, he could not tell what the dream was about, 
but still it troubled him, and he could not sleep because 
of it. 

At last the king called for his wise men. He thought that if 
they were as wise as they pretended to be, they ought to be 
able to tell both the dream and the meaning of it. When 
they came in, Nebuchadnezzar made known to them his 



GOD HEARS DANIEL'S PRAYER. 183 

trouble, and asked them to tell hiin the meaning of his dream. 
The men answered that they would do so if he would tell 
them what he had dreamed. The king told them that he 
could not remember the dream; and he said that if they could 
tell the dream and the meaning, he would make them rich 
gifts, but if not, he would destroy them all. The men said 
that no man on earth could do such a thing as to tell what 
another person had dreamed, and no king had ever asked such 
a thing before. They said that no one but the gods could 
tell him his dream. The king was then ver}^ angry, and he 
commanded that all the wise men in Babylon should be 
killed. 

Now Daniel and his companions were considered wise 
men, but they had heard nothing of the king's dream until 
they received word that they were to be put to death with the 
others. When Daniel heard of the king's command, he went 
to the king, and told him that if he would give him a little 
time, he would tell the dream and the meaning of it. The 
king promised to wait, and then Daniel went to his friends 
and told them about the matter, and asked them to pray that 
God would make known the dream so that they need not die. 
The four young men prayed very earnestly, and that night 
G-od came to Daniel and showed him the dream and its mean- 
ing. Daniel and his friends were very thankful for G-od's 
help, and they praised him for his goodness to them. 

Daniel then went to the man who was to kill the wise men, 
and told him to do them no harm, for he would make known 
to the king his dream. Daniel was then brought before the 
king in great haste. Nebuchadnezzar asked him if he could 
tell the dream and its meaning. Daniel answered that neither 
he nor any of the wise men could do so ; but he said there was 
a God in heaven who could tell secrets, and he had made known 
to the king his dream. Daniel then began to tell the king 
what he had dreamed. In our next lesson we will learn what 
it was. 



184 Nebuchadnezzar's dream. 

LESSON CXXXV. 

NEBUCHADNEZZAR'S DREAM. 

When Daniel came in before Nebuchadnezzar, he began at 
once to tell him the dream. He said that the king saw in his 
dream a great image. The image was bright, and as it stood 
before the king, it looked terrible. The head was of fine gold, 
the breast and arms were of silver, the thighs of brass, the legs 
of iron, and the feet were part of iron and part of clay. A 
stone cut from a mountain fell upon the feet of this image, 
and it was broken in pieces. The iron and clay, the brass, 
the silver, and the gold then became like chaff, and the wind 
blew it away. The stone that fell upon the image became a 
great mountain, and filled the whole earth. 

As soon as Nebuchadnezzar heard the dream, it all came 
back to him, and he knew that Daniel had told him the truth. 
Daniel then went on to tell the meaning of the dream. He 
said that it had been given to the king to show him what was 
coming to pass in the future. The image, he said, represented 
Nebuchadnezzar and all who should ever live upon the earth. 
As the image became like chaff, and was carried away, so this 
earth and all the wicked people upon it would sometime be de- 
stroyed. Afterward the G-od of heaven would make a new 
earth, and Jesus his Son would be its king. Daniel told Neb- 
uchadnezzar that what G-od had shown him would surely come 
to pass. 

The kiug then fell upon his face, and worshiped Daniel. 
He said that Daniel's God must surely be greater than all 
gods, and one who could make known the most secret things. 

Nebuchadnezzar then gave gifts to Daniel, and made him 
ruler over all Babylon. He also showed kindness to Daniel's 
three friends. 



NEBUCHADNEZZAR'S GREAT IMAGE. 185 

LESSON CXXXVI. 

NEBUCHADNEZZAR'S GREAT IMAGE. 

Nebuchadnezzar was a strange man. He knew that the 
God of heaven was greater than all other gods, but still he 
would not worship him. He seemed to think that there was 
no one greater than himself, and he felt that he could do as 
he pleased. 

After a time Nebuchadnezzar made an image and set it up 
in a field. This image was made of gold, and was very large. 
It was as tall as some of our highest buildings. 

After the image was set up, the king gathered the people 
together to worship it. They met in the field, and the crowd 
was very great, for nearly every body was present. The king 
told the people that when they heard the sound of music, they 
must bow down and worship the image. If an}' one failed 
to do this, the king said he should be thrown into a fiery 
furnace. 

Among the crowd that day were Daniel's three friends. 
They knew that G-od had forbidden people to bow down to 
images, and they would not disobey him. The king had been 
very kind to them, and they would have been glad to please 
him, but they felt that they must please God first. 

The young men did not have long to think over the mat- 
ter, for soon the music was heard. The people then fell down 
before the image, but Daniel's three friends remained standing. 
They were alone among all that people, but they did not fear, 
for they knew that Grod was on their side. 

Word was soon oarried to the king that the three young 
men whom he had chosen for his servants, had disobeyed him, 
and had not bowed to his image. Nebuchadnezzar was then 
very angry, and he had the young men brought before him. 
He told them that he would give them one more chance, and 
if they did not then bow down to the image, the} T should be 



186 IN THE FIERY FURNACE. 

cast into the furnace, and "Who," said he, "is the G-od that 
can save you out of my hand ? " The young men answered 
the king modestly, yet firmly. They told him that their God 
was able to save them. "But," said the} r , " whether he will 
help us or not, we will not worship your gods nor bow down 

to your image." 

• — ♦ — • 

LESSON CXXXVII. 

IN THE FIERY FURNACE. 

Nebuchadnezzar was a great man. He was king over the 
whole earth, and it was not often that any one dared to diso- 
bey him. When he heard that the three young men had not 
bowed to his image, he was very angry, yet he wished to save 
them, for they were among his wisest servants. But when he 
heard them say so firmly that they would never worship his 
gods nor bow to his image, his rage knew no bounds. He 
told his servants to heat the furnace seven times hotter than 
usual. He then commanded the most mighty men in his 
army to bind the young men, and cast them into the roaring 
flames. The soldiers obeyed, but the furnace was so hot that 
the flames burst out upon them and killed them. 

Pretty soon the king came to the people in great haste, 
and asked them if there were not three men bound and cast 
into the furnace. They answered, "True, king." "But," 
said the king, " I see four men loose, walking in the midst of 
the fire, and the} r have received no hurt, and one looks like 
the son of a god." Nebuchadnezzar then went near the door 
of the furnace and cried, " Ye servants of the most high God, 
come forth." The three companions then walked out of the 
furnace, and stood before the king. They were not harmed 
in the least. Their hair was not even singed, neither was 
there the smell of fire upon their clothing. Nebuchadnezzar 
then blessed the God of heaven, and he commanded the peo- 
ple that they should never speak against him, "for" said he, 



NEBUCHADNEZZAR DRIVEN FROM HOME. 18'? 

"no other god can deliver after this sort." Nebuchadnezzar 
was very kind to his three servants after this, and he made 
them great men in Babylon. 

Do you think 3-011 could stand up for God as these 
young men did ? They did not know that God would save 
them, but they were determined to obey him, no matter what 
happened to them. They thought it better to die for their 
Heavenly Father than to live and disobey him. How thank- 
ful we ought to be that we can obey the Lord, with no 
one to harm us ! It may not always be as pleasant for us as 
it is now, and we should serve the Lord the best we know how 
every day. He will then be ready to help us at any time. 

Nebuchadnezzar said the fourth person in the furnace 
looked like the son of a god. Who do you think it was ? 



LESSON CXXXVIII. 

NEBUCHADNEZZAR DRIVEN FROM HOME. 

Nebuchadnezzar was a very proud king. He did not wor- 
ship the true God, neither did he feel any need of his help. 
He thought he was able to care for himself, and to do as he 
pleased. He soon learned, however, that God is greater than 
idols, and greater than all the kings of this earth, and can do 
with them as he thinks best. 

After a time, God gave Nebuchadnezzar another dream. 
In this dream he saw a large tree, reaching to heaven. The 
tree could be seen from all parts of the world. All the beasts 
of the field could stand in its shade, and all the birds of the 
air could lodge in its branches. The fruit was food for all 
people. An angel came from heaven and cried, " Cut down 
the tree, cut off its branches, shake off the leaves, and scatter 
the fruit ! " The angel then commanded that a band of iron 
and brass should be put around the stump of the tree, and that 
it should be left in the field with the beasts for seven years. 



188 THE WRITING OX THE WALL. 

It was a very strange dream indeed, and no one could tell 
the meaning of it. The king then sent for Daniel, who, when 
he heard the dream, seemed much surprised and troubled. 
He told the king that the dream was one which would please 
his enemies. The tree, he said, was none other than the king 
himself. He told Nebuchadnezzar that the time was coming 
when G-od would take from him his right mind, and he would 
then be driven out from among the people, and made to live 
with the beasts for seven years. Daniel said that this trouble 
was coming upon the king to show him that dod was greater 
than he, and could do with him as he saw fit. Daniel urged 
him to leave off his sins and serve the true G-od, so that he 
might be saved this great trouble ; but the king would not 
listen. He kept on in his wicked ways, thinking himself a 
great man, and worshiping his idols, as before. 

About a year after the dream, all that Daniel had told the 
king came to pass. He became mad, and wandered about in 
the fields with the beasts, and ate grass like the oxen. His 
hair grew coarse and long, and his nails looked like birds' 
claws. For seven years the king lived in this way, and then 
G-od gave him his reason again. He then took his place once 
more as king, but he was not the man that he had once been. 
He had learned that the G-od of heaven was greater than he, 
and he praised and worshiped him. 



LESSON CXXXIX. 

THE WRITING ON THE WALL. 

After Nebuchadnezzar died, his grandson became king. 
He was a very wicked man, and cared nothing for the true 
God. 

One night he held a great feast in his palace, and invited a 
thousand of his friends to drink wine with him. The feast 
was continued far into the night, and after a time the company 



THE WRITING ON THE WALL. 



189 



became drunken. They did not care then what they did ; the 
more wicked they could be, the better they were pleased. 

At last the king sent for the holy dishes that his grand- 
father had taken from Solomon's temple. These golden ves- 
sels had never been used only in God's worship, but the king 




THE WKITINS ON THE WALi. 



had them filled with wine, and he and his drunken companions 
drank from them. This was a very wicked act in G-od's sight, 
and he could not let it pass unpunished. 

While these wicked people were eating and drinking, all at 
once they saw a hand, writing on the wall. No one present 
could read the writing. The king was much frightened ; his 
knees shook, and all could see that he was greatly troubled. 
The wise men were sent for, and the king promised them rich 



190 DESTRUCTION OF BABYLON. 

gifts if they would only tell him the meaning of the strange 
words before him ; but the wise men could not even read the 
writing. The king's grandmother then came and told him about 
Daniel. She said that he had been able to tell the meaning 
of Nebuchadnezzar's dreams, and she thought he could read 
the writing. 

Daniel was then brought in, and the king made him the 
same promises that he had made the wise men. Daniel told 
the king that he did not want his presents, but he said he 
would tell what the writing meant. He then told the king 
that although he had known all that had happened to his grand- 
father, still he had worshiped idols, and now Glod said, in the 
strange words before him, that he should no longer be king, 
but another should take his place. 

The king did not seem to be much frightened at what 
Daniel said, and kept on with his feast, but that night he was 
killed. In our next lesson we will learn more about him. 



LESSON CXL. 
DESTRUCTION OF BABYLON. 

Babylon was a very great city. When Daniel lived, it was 
the largest and grandest in the world. The buildings were 
high and costly, and they were arranged in a square, with broad 
streets. 

Around the city was a wall higher than our tallest buildings 
and broad enough for a drive-way. This wall was sixty miles 
long, and it had a hundred gates, made of brass. A river ran 
through the city, and on each side of the river were also high 
walls and gates. 

One of the beautiful sights in this city was the hanging 
gardens, made by Nebuchadnezzar. They were built up high 
in the air, and held there by pillars and arches. In these gar- 



DESTRUCTION OF BABYLON. 191 

dens were not onh* flowers and fountains, but trees of the 
largest size, and they must have looked beautiful indeed. 

For some time before the feast spoken of in our last lesson, 
a king by the name of Cjtus had been trj'ing to take Babylon. 
He could not break down the wall, for it was too strong, neither 
could his army get over the top of it. He could not starve 
the people b}' keeping them shut inside, for they had food 
enough to last them many years. 

In none of these wa} T s could Cyrus get inside of the walls. 
He had heard, however, that the people of Babylon were soon 
to have a great feast, and he thought it probable that they 
would be very careless at such a time, and he hoped then to 
get into the city ; so he began to make his plans. 

The night of the feast, Cyrus heard the din and noise within, 
and knowing that the people must be drunken and all taken 
up with their feast, he determined to enter the city if possible. 
Far into the night, when all was dark, and the people were the 
merriest, he turned the water out of the river into a place which 
had been made ready for it. He then commanded his army 
to go down into the river bottom and march through under the 
walls. Cyrus did not know that he could get into the city 
even then, for should the gates be locked that led from the 
river to the city, it would be just as impossible to get inside 
as before. But as it happened, or as God would have it, the 
people had no thought of the army outside their walls, and had 
left the river gates open, and Cyrus and his army marched 
into the city with no one to hinder them. They were soon 
seen, and a great cry was raised, but it was too late ; the army 
was already killing the people and burning their beautiful 
buildings. Some of the soldiers went to the palace where the 
king was holding his feast, and killed him there, and so all 
came to pass as Daniel had said it would. 



192 



DANIEL IN THE LIONS' DEN. 



LESSON CXLI. 

DANIEL IN THE LIONS' DEN. 

After Babylon was destroyed, Darius, an uncle of Cyrus, be- 
came king of the whole world. He did not worship the God of 

heaven, but he was 
a kind man, and his 
people loved him. 
He had heard of 
Daniel, and when 
he saw that he was 
a wise man and 
one to be trusted, 
he made him the 
greatest of his of- 
ficers. This made 
the other great 
men jealous of 
Daniel, and they 
were anxious to 
find some fault in 
him that they 
might tell it to the 
king. These men 
knew that they 
could find nothing 
to complain of un- 
his worshiping the 




DANIEL IN THE LIONS' DEN. 



less it should be something in regard to 
true God. 

Daniel always prayed three times a day, and these men 
knew it. They knew too that nothing could keep him from 
doing this. They talked the matter over among themselves, 
and decided to ask the king to make a command that if any- 
one should ask anything of any God or man except the king, 



DANIEL IN THE LIONS' DEN. 193 

for three days, he should be thrown into a den of lions. 
Darius did not know what the men were trying to do, so to 
please them, he did as they wished. 

Daniel knew what the king had commanded, but he went to 
his house, and with his windows open, prayed three times a day 
as usual. 

The men were watching to see what lie would do, and so 
they went to the king and told him that Daniel was disobeying 
him by pra} T ing to his God. 

Darius then saw what those wicked men were trying to do, 
and he was greatly troubled. He loved Daniel and wanted to 
save him, and all day he tried to think of some way to help him, 
but he could not. In that country a command once made by a 
king could never be changed, and so Darius could do nothing. 

When night came, the king sent for Daniel, and told him 
that he could not help him, " but " said he, "your God whom you 
worship, he will save you." He then commanded that Daniel 
should be cast into the den of lions. 

The king then went to his house, but he could not sleep, 
neither would he eat. Very early in the morning he went in 
haste to the den, and cried, " Daniel, is thy God able to save 
thee from the lions ? " Daniel was indeed safe, and he an- 
swered, " king, live forever ! My God hath sent his angel, 
and hath shut the lions' mouths, that they have not hurt me." 

Then the king was very glad, and he sent for some men to 
take Daniel out of the den. He afterward commanded that those 
wicked men who had tried to harm Daniel should themselves 
be thrown into the den. This was done, and they were torn in 
pieces before they ever reached the bottom of the cave. 

Darius then wrote to his people in all parts of the world, 
commanding them to fear the God of heaven, the one who had 
saved Daniel from the lions ; for he was the living God, and 
could do great signs and wonders. 

13 



194 DANIEL PRATS FOR HIS PEOPLE. 

LESSON CXLII. 

DANIEL PRAYS FOR HIS PEOPLE. 

The children of Judah were called Jews after a time. TVe 
often hear of Jews nowadays, and perhaps you have seen some 
of these people. They do not live together in one country as 
they used to do so many years ago, but are now scattered all 
over the world, a few here and a few there. As most of them 
are merchants, they usually live in cities. Their language is 
different from ours, so many of them do not speak as we do ; 
and instead of keeping Sunday for the Sabbath, as many peo- 
ple do, they keep Saturday, the seventh day, — the day God 
said his people should keep. 

It used to be that only the Jews were God's people, but 
now we are all his people if we only do right. Xo matter who 
we are or what language we speak, we are God's people if we 
love and obey him. 

When the Jews were still in Jerusalem, Jeremiah, whom 
they treated so cruelly, told them that they would sometime 
be taken to Babylon, and kept there seventy years. He said 
that at the end of that time they would be allowed to go back 
to their own city. 

Now Daniel had read in books what Jeremiah had said, 
and he believed it. He knew that the Jews had now been in 
Babylon about seventy years, and he was very anxious that 
they should go back to their own country. He began praying 
about the matter. He told the Lord that he knew his people 
had been very wicked, but he asked him to forgive them, and 
to let them return to their own land. 

Daniel prayed very earnestly, and God heard him. Even 
while he was praying, an angel touched him, and told him that 
God loved him very much, and had heard his prayer. The 
angel then told Daniel what was coming to pass in the future. 



THE JEWS RETURN TO JERUSALEM. 195 

God gave Daniel several wonderful dreams, or visions, 
and told him about things that are happening now while we 
live. 

The angel said that God loved Daniel greatly. Wiry did 
he love him so much ? Can you tell ? 



LESSON CXLIII. 

THE JEWS RETURN TO JERUSALEM. 

After Darius died, Cyrus became king. He did not wor- 
ship the true God, but he was willing that the Jews should. 
He was very kind to them, and they loved him, even more 
than they had loved his Uncle Darius. 

Many years before Cyrus was born, a prophet spoke of 
him, even giving his name, and said that he would sometime 
help God's people. 

The Jews had now been away from Jerusalem nearly 
seventy j-ears, and God put it into the heart of Cyrus to let 
them go back to their own land. No doubt Daniel talked 
with him about the matter too, and urged him to let them go. 

C}tus told the Jews that they might return to Jerusalem, 
and take with them everything that was theirs. And beside 
he said they might have all that Nebuchadnezzar had taken 
from Solomon's temple, and he gave them food and horses 
and mules for their journey. 

Some of the Jews did not care to go back to Jerusalem, 
but many of them were very glad to return and to build again 
their beloved city. They had a long, hard journey before 
them, but they started away with glad and joyful hearts. They 
were happy, but still they were sad, for they knew that they 
would find their city, once so lovely, in ruins because of their 
wicked ways. While in Babylon all those years, they had 
learned that God knows best, and that he must be obeyed. 

When the Jews reached Jerusalem, the} T found it as the}' 



196 REBUILDING JERUSALEM 

expected, — nothing but heaps of stones and rubbish. They 
had no houses, but as their first work was to be the building of 
God's house, they pitched tents, and lived in them. Before 
beginning their work, they built an altar so that they could 
make offerings to God. 

The people were mostly poor at this time, and they could 
not make the temple as beautiful as Solomon had made it. 
Old men who had seen the first temple, would often weep 
when they remembered its beauty. Still they were thankful 
that they could be in their own land, and build again God's 
house, even if it could not be as lovely as at first. 



LESSON CXLIV. 

REBUILDING JERUSALEM. 

The Jews were greatly hindered in their work by the 
people living near them. Some of the people pretended to 
be friendly to the Jews, but many mocked and made fun, and 
did all they could to hinder them. Because of these wicked 
neighbors the Jews at last gave up their work. 

At this time good king Cyrus was dead, and another man 
was king in his place. This new king was also kind to the 
Jews, and when he heard of their trouble, he told them to go 
on with their building, and promised to help them. 

The Jews then began their work again, but it was many 
years before the temple was ready for use. The people were 
few, and they were hindered so much, that it took a long time 
to do the work. 

When the temple was at last finished, offerings were made, 
and it was given to God as was the temple made by Solomon. 
The Jews were then very happy indeed, and they thanked 
God that they had once more a house where they could wor- 
ship him. 

The new temple did not have the ark in it, for it could 



REBUILDING JERUSALEM. 197 

never be found after Jerusalem was destroyed. Some think 
that Jeremiah hid it at that time, so that it would not be 
harmed, and others think that God took it to heaven. 

After a time a man named Ezra came to Jerusalem, and 
with him many of the Jews who had remained in Babylon. 
Ezra was sent by the king that he might teach the people and 
help them in different ways. 

Several years after this time, one of the king's servants, 
a Jew named Nehemiah, heard that his people were still hav- 
ing trouble at Jerusalem, and that the wall was not yet built. 
Nehemiah was a good man and loved his people, and he 
prayed that God would put it into the king's heart to let him 
go and help them. God heard his prayer, and the king said 
he might go. 

When Nehemiah came to Jerusalem, the Jews were glad 
to see him, and were very willing to join him in building the 
wall. The}' began the work, and the wicked people outside 
commenced at once to trouble them. They did not want the 
wall to be built, and were determined to stop the work. The 
Jews prayed to God for help, and while half of the people 
worked on the wall, the other half stood around with swords 
and spears to keep their wicked neighbors from doing them 
harm. In this way the people worked from early moraing 
until the stars were seen at night. God cared for his people, 
and at last the wall was finished, and then their enemies could 
do them no harm. 

Jerusalem was not as beautiful as it had been, but it was 
once more the home of God's people, and they were content. 
They were thankful for God's love and care in bringing them 
back to their own land, and they were willing to serve and 
obey him. 

Daniel never went back to Jerusalem. He was an old 
man at that time, — too old, perhaps, for such a long journey. 



198 ESTHER. 

LESSON CXLV. 

ESTHER. 

Among the Jews who stayed in Babylon was a little girl 
named Esther. Her father and mother were dead, and she 
lived with one of her cousins. This cousin was a good man, 
and he was very kind to Esther, and always treated her as 
though she were his own child. 

As Esther grew older, she was both good and beautiful. 
Her cousin saw this, and he was anxious to have her become 
acquainted with the king, hoping that she might in some way 
be a help to her people, the Jews. 

This cousin was one of the king's servants, and was often 
at his palace, so he took Esther to see the king. The king 
liked Esther very much, and after a time married her and 
made her a queen. Esther did not let the king know that she 
was a Jew, for her cousin had told her to say nothing about it. 

The king's most honored servant was a man named Haman. 
He had become such a great man that the people were very 
anxious to please him ; and as he passed them on the street, 
they would bow very low to show him honor. 

But Haman was not a good man. He was proud and 
wicked, and hated the Jews. Esther's cousin knew this, 
and when he met Haman, he would not bow to him as others 
did. This made Haman very angry, and he determined to kill 
his enemy, if possible. The best way, he thought, would be 
to have all the Jews killed, and then he would have no more 
trouble because of them. 

Haman went to the king and told him that the Jews were 
a bad people, and that the country would be much better off 
if they were all dead and out of the way. He said he would 
be willing to give a large sum of money to have them killed. 
The king did not know much about the Jews, and he thought 



ESTHER BEFORE THE KING. 199 

that what Haman had said was probably true, so he told his 
servant that he might do as he pleased with the people. 

The king did not know that Esther and her cousin were 
Jews. Had he known it, he would not have given the answer 
that he did, and no doubt Haman would not have spoken to 
the king had he known that the queen was a Jew. As it was, 
Haman was much pleased with the king's answer, and he made 
a command that on a certain day all the Jews should be 
killed. 



LESSON CXLVI. 

ESTHER BEFORE THE KING. 

When the Jews received the word that they were to die, 
they were much afraid. They wept, and put on sackcloth, and 
sat in ashes. They knew that no one could help them, but 
Esther, and she would have to risk her life to do it. 

In those days, if any one entered the king's room without 
being asked to do so, it was thought to be very wrong ; and 
the one who did it had to die, no matter if it was the queen 
herself, unless the king held out a golden rod which he carried 
in his hand. 

When Esther heard of Haman' s command, she was greatly 
troubled. She sent word to the Jews to pray for her, and to 
neither eat nor drink for three days. She said that she and 
her servants would do the same, and then she would go in to 
see the king. 

Esther knew that she might have to die, but she was will- 
ing to do all she could for her people, so the third day she 
went into the king's room. When the king saw her, he was 
not angry, but held out to her the golden rod. He knew that 
she would not have risked her life for nothing, so he asked her 
what she wanted. She answered that she would like to have 
him and Haman come to a feast which she had made for them. 



200 ESTHER SAVES HER PEOPLE. 

The king an<2 Haman were present at the feast as Esther 
wished, and she asked them to come again the next day. She 
had intended to tell the king at this time what Haman was try- 
ing to do, but she felt afraid, and so said nothing, but asked 
them to come again. 

Esther's cousin had once saved the king's life, and that 
night the king remembered the matter, and began to wonder if 
an}'thing had been- done to repay the man for his kindness. 
He asked his servants, and they said that no reward had been 
given. Just then Haman was heard at the door, and the king 
told his servants to let him come in. 

Haman had left the queen's feast with a glad heart, but on 
his way home, he passed Esther's cousin, who paid no atten- 
tion to him, as usual, and Haman was so angry that he wanted 
his enemy killed at once. So he went home, and had a gallows 
made on which to hang him. Haman did not dare to harm the 
man without asking the king, and it was for this purpose that 
he had come to see him. 

The king was still thinking about the man who had saved 
his life, and without waiting for Haman to tell what he wanted, 
said to him, "What shall be done to the man to whom I wish 
to show great kindness ? " Haman thought that he of course 
must be the one the king was thinking about, so he answered, 
"Let him be dressed in the king's clothing, and ride upon the 
king's horse, and have a crown placed upon his head. Let 
one of the king's most honored servants lead the horse through 
the streets, and say to the people, ' Thus shall it be clone to the 
man whom the king delighteth to honor.' " 



LESSON CXLVII. 

ESTHER SAVES HER PEOPLE. 
Haman supposed that he was the one to whom the king 
wished to show kindness, and so asked great honors for 



ESTHER SAVES HER PEOPLE. 201 

himself. He did not know that he was asking for his enemy, 
and when the king told him to do to his servant, the Jew, as 
had been said, he was greatly surprised and disappointed. 
He saw that the honor was to be shown to the very man he 
hated, and worst of all, he was chosen to go before his 
enemy to lead his horse. 

Haman was very angry, but he hid his feelings, and did 
for Esther's cousin as the king had commanded. He then 
went home very sad, with his head covered, and told his 
friends all that had happened to him. While he was talking 
with them, the king's servant came to tell him that the queen's 
feast was ready. 

The king knew that Esther had somethiDg to say to him, 
and at the first feast, he asked her what it was, but she did 
not tell him. When he came to the second feast, he asked 
her again what she wanted, promising to do for her anything 
she might ask. Esther then asked him to save her life and 
the lives of her people. She told him that a command had 
been made to put them to death. The king did not seem to 
remember about the Jews, and he asked who had done such a 
thing. Esther answered that it was the wicked Haman who 
was there with them. The king then knew that she was 
speaking of the Jews, and that she was one of that people. 
He was not displeased with her because of this, but he was 
very angry with Haman. Haman was much frightened, and 
begged for his life, but the king would not forgive him. He 
was then taken and hung on the gallows he had made ready 
for Esther's cousin. 

Esther afterward told the king that the servant who had 
saved his life, was her cousin, and the king then made him a 
great man in Haman' s place, and all that had belonged to 
Haman was given to Esther. 

The king- could not take back the command he had let 
Haman make, but he helped the Jews all that he could, and 



202 job. 

but a few were harmed. Had it not been for Esther, perhaps 
all of God's people would have been killed at that time. 
Don't you suppose that it was God who sent her to help 
them? 



LESSON CXLVIII. 

JOB. 

Before we leave this little book, we must study about one 
more good man. His name was Job. It is not known when 
he lived, but he had flocks and herds, and dwelt in a tent as 
did Abraham, and perhaps he lived at the same time. 

Job was very rich. He had five hundred yoke of oxen, 
and ever so many camels and mules and sheep, and other 
animals. He owned much land too, and had many servants 
to do his work. He also had seven sons and three daughters, 
and he was thought to be a great man in those days. Not 
only was he great and rich, but he was good as well, and he 
taught his children to do right. 

One time, God met Satan, and asked him where he had 
been. Satan answered that he had been walking up and down 
on the earth. God asked him if he had noticed what a good 
man Job was. " Yes," said Satan, "Job is good, but the rea- 
son is that he has everything he wants, and never has any 
trouble. If he should lose all that he has, he would become 
wicked and curse thee." God told Satan that he might 
try Job if he wished by taking everything from him, and see 
if he would be wicked. Satan was very glad of a chance to 
harm somebody, so he started away to find Job. 

One day, as Job was sitting in his house, and his children 
were away taking dinner at the home of their oldest brother, 
a servant came running to him, saying that some robbers had 
taken away his oxen, and had killed his servants who were 
caring for them. 



JOB AND HIS THREE FRIENDS. 203 

While this servant was speaking, another came, and said 
that fire had come down from heaven, and burned up the sheep 
and the men who were with them. 

Before this servant was through talking, another came, 
and said that some men had taken away the camels, and had 
killed the servants caring for them. 

This was very bad news to hear all at once, but in a few 
moments another servant came to Job to tell him that a storm 
had struck the house where his children were eating dinner, 
and all his sons were killed. Job then arose and tore his 
clothes, and fell to the ground. He was in great distress. 
He saw that he was a poor man — his cattle all gone and his 
servants, — but worst of all to him was the sad news that his 
sons were dead. 

Most people would have complained at such trouble as 
this. They would have said that Glod was unkind, and did 
not care for them ; but Job did not feel that way, — he bowed 
his head and worshiped Grod. Job knew that it was his 
Heavenly Father who had let the trouble come upon him, so 
he simply said, "The Lord gave me my riches and my 
children, and now the Lord has taken them away." 



LESSON CXLIX. 

JOB AND HIS THREE FRIENDS. 

Satan was greatly disappointed when he saw Job worship- 
ing Glod. He had hoped that his great trouble would make 
him complain and murmur against the Lord. Satan does not 
like to have people do right, and when he sees any one try- 
ing hard to be good, he does his best to make them do wrong. 
This was his reason for troubling Job. 

It was not long until God again met Satan, and he asked 
him if he did not know now that Job was a good man. Satan 
answered that Job would curse the Lord if some terrible sick- 



204 JOB AND HIS THREE FRIENDS. 

ness should be brought upon him. God told Satan that Job 
was in his hand, and he might bring the sickness, "only," 
said he, "save his life." 

Satan then sent boils upon Job. They were very painful, 
and were all over his body from his head to his feet. Job 
did not like to stay where other people were, so he went off 
by himself and lay down on a heap of ashes. He would not 
complain, but he was in such distress that he wished he could 
die. His wife thought he would better give up trying to do 
right, but he told her that she talked like a foolish woman. 
He said that people must expect to have trouble sometimes. 

After a while three of Job's friends came to see him. 
They sat down on the ground by his side, and putting ashes 
on their heads, never spoke a word for seven days and seven 
nights. They did this to show how sorry they were for him. 

Job's friends could not see why he should have so much 
trouble. They thought it must be that he had done some- 
thing wrong, and Grod was punishing him for it. Thej^ finally 
told Job what they thought, and urged him to confess his sin. 
Job told them that he had done nothing wrong. But they 
still kept talking to him, until Job felt that he could bear it 
no longer, and he cried out, " Have pity on me, have pity on 
me, my friends ! " Although Job wanted so much to have 
his friends comfort him, still they kept talking to him about 
his sin, and made him feel worse than before. 

God at last spoke to Job out of a whirlwind, and talked 
with him a long time. He then spoke to Job's friends, and 
told them that he was displeased because of the wa}^ they had 
talked to Job. He told them to make ready an offering and 
have Job pray for them, or they would be punished as they 
deserved. 

After this Job was made well again, and the Lord gave 
him twice as many cattle as he had before, and also gave him 
seven sons again. His brothers and sisters came to see him, 



JOB AND HIS THREE FRIENDS. 205 

and every man gave him a piece of mone}\ After his trouble, 
Job lived over a hundred years. 

We see by this story that good people have trouble some- 
times, as well as those who are wicked. God lets sorrow and 
sickness come upon them, to see if they will complain and 
fret. Even little children are tried in this wa}', and we should 
all be very careful, and never find fault with anything that 
may happen to us, for God may be watching to see if we are 
going to let Satan lead us into wrong. 






SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 



No two persons can teach alike and be natural, and no teacher 
should dictate to another in his work ; however, all can receive benefit 
from the ideas and experience of others. 

Thinking that some persons may be called upon to use this little 
book, who have had no special preparation for teaching Bible history, it 
is thought advisable to give a few suggestions which may aid in the 
work. 

GENERAL INSTRUCTION. 

1. Make yourself familiar with the lesson, and with all points of 
history closely connected with it. The Notes on each lesson will give the 
needed references. 

2. Remember that you are teaching God's word, and that your great 
object should be, 1. To develop the reasoning powers in regard to religion 
and right ; 2. To enliven the conscience ; 3. To direct the mind toward 
God, who only can make the heart pure. 

3. No matter how simple the lesson may be, prepare yourself by 
prayer and careful thought to teach it as God would have you. 

4. Have ready in mind the practical truths which should be brought 
before the class. 

5. Read carefully the Notes on each lesson. If illustrations are to 
be used, come to the class fully prepared for the work. 

6. If the pupils are very young, it may be necessary to read the 
lessons to them. Under these circumstances, a lesson can be read one 
day and recited the next. Ordinary pupils will remember the story 
after hearing it read once or twice. 

7. Be independent of the text-book while conducting the recitation. 

8. Generally, each lesson should be introduced by a brief review of 
the preceding one ; and after finishing a subject, a day or two should be 
spent in review. 

9. No questions have been printed in connection with these lessons. 
After reading General Instruction, Nos. 7 and 10, you will readily see 



'1 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

the reason. Xo one can ask the questions or adapt thern to the class as 
well as the teacher in charge, and so that work is not attempted here. 

10. When illustrating hy the use of objects or upon the blackboard, 
do not let the illustration take a leading part in the recitation, but keep 
it subordinate to the lesson. Otherwise, illustrations will do more harm 
than good, as the mind of the child will be taken up with the illustra- 
tion to the neglect of the subject and the effect of the lesson. 

Also do not try to represent that of which the human mind can have 
no clear conception. In teaching the Bible, illustrations should be used 
with great care, or they will lead the young mind in a wrong direction, 
and will give an incorrect idea of holy things. Every teacher, however. 
should be ready at any time to illustrate with a few marks upon the 
board, with a motion of the hand, or by the use of some familiar object, 
any point which can thus be made more plain. If illustrations are used, 
weave them in with the questions and answers. 

11. In the blackboard illustrations, do not try to be too artistic. 
Some teachers may not be able to make very handsome drawings, but 
this lack will not hinder in this work in the least. No matter whether 
the pictures are true to the original or not. If the children know what 
they represent, that is all that is necessary. Young pupils will be just 
as much delighted with a rude, simple drawing as with one more true 
and perfect. Especially will this be the case if they are allowed to assist 
in the drawing ; and this should be done as far as possible. In all illus- 
trations, whether with crayons, or with other material, the children 
should do the work as far as practicable, the teacher directing in the ex- 
ercise, and asking the questions. 

When a large . blackboard is not at hand, slates and pencils can be 
used. Small hand-blackboards can be made with very little expense, 
and are very convenient. Every teacher should have a box of colored 
crayons, which may be obtained at any bookstore. 

12. The lessons are necessarily brief, and many interesting facts 
have been left out. When time will permit, it may be well to bring in a 
few of the most interesting of these points. Great care should be taken, 
however, lest the minds of the children be led from the object of the 
lesson. Never wander from the subject, nor allow the class to do so. 

13. Be sure to apply the lesson to the every-day lives and actions of 
the pupils. Let them do this for themselves as far as possible. They 
will do much better than one would suppose, and many times will make 
closer applications than they would like to have others make. The 
teacher should di ect in this exercise, and now and then make an appli- 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. S 

cation of the lesson himself ; but as a general thing, the children will 
bring out the practical points of the lesson if led out to do so. 

14. Children have original thoughts, and they like to express them. 
Encourage them to do so. Let them talk, and tell what they know, and 
what they think. 

The most successful teachers are those who draw from the minds of 
their pupils what there is in them. By this method of instruction the 
mind is strengthened and made to expand, and the pupils never lack in 
good, healthy interest. The teacher should ever be ready to assist and to 
give instruction where it is needed ; but during the recitation, he should 
not occupy too much time in telling what he knows. 

15. In all your talk with the children, make prominent the good- 
ness and love of God. Teach them to fear God, but at the same time to 
love him. Show them how necessary it is that they do right every day, 
and help them to see how weak they are to do this of themselves. Lead 
them to Christ their strength, and if possible, plant the seed of faith in 
each young heart. 

16. Make the children feel perfectly at home in their recitation. 
When talking with them, let your language be simple, but not too child- 
ish. Adapt yourself to the class, and be one with them, but at the same 
time preserve your dignity as teacher. 



NOTES ON THE LESSON. 

INTRODUCTION. 

It is to be understood that all the points of each lesson are to be 
brought out by careful questioning. The following notes are simply 
suggestive of additional ideas which may be of interest and profit in 
conducting the recitation. The teacher need not confine himself to the 
suggestions here given, but should seek to make better plans, and to vary 
the instruction to meet the wants of the class. 

In the Notes, reference will be made to blackboard illustration. 
These hints are for the benefit of those who may prefer this method 
of teaching. 

In the lesson, all words not understood by the pupils should be 
clearly defined and applied ; and all objects referred to should be fully 
described if they are not already familiar to every member of the class. 

The teacher should have a few good reference books, such as the 
Great Controversy, a good Bible dictionary, and if possible, a Bible 
cyclopaedia and a Bible commentary. 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 



LESSOR I. 



The first lesson can be pleasantly introduced by talking with the 
children in an informal way about their Bibles. Find out how many 
have Bibles. Ask the children if they like to hear the Bible read. Per- 
haps some will remember a Bible story that they have heard. If so, 
spend a few moments talking about it if they seem anxious to do so. 
Lead the children out in conversation, and let them talk of the 
merits of the Bible, and of God who gave us such a good book. Make 
God a reality, and impress his greatness upon the minds of the pupils, 
and do not forget to make prominent his kindness and love. In talking 
of God, go no farther than the lesson carries you. See General Instruc- 
tion, No. 16. 

LESSON II. 

Bead Bev. 21 ; 22 ; Early Writings, parti, pp. 12, 13. The following 
model lesson is an illustration of the daily recitation. If the teacher 
prefers to illustrate by the use of objects, the exercise is essentially the 
same, the illustrating and the questioning going on at the same time. If 
it is thought best by .the teacher to make a drawing of the heavenly city, 
with its walls and gates, and mansions, etc., the work should be done 
while conducting the recitation, the children taking part in the exercise. 
Do not try to work without the colored crayons. 

Notice that the answers to be given in concert are short, and those 
in regard to which there will be no difference of opinion. When called 
upon individually, let the pupils stand while reciting, as this will give a 
better appearance to the class, and will allow some change for their 
active bodies. 

QUESTIONS (Model). 

1. What was our lesson about yesterday? [Answer given in 
concert] 

2. Is the Bible a good book ? [Concert.] 

3. Who wrote it? [Concert.] 

4. Who told them what to- write? [Concert] 

5. Who is God. George ? 

6. Who is Jesus? [Concert.] 

7. Do God and Jesus live upon this earth ? [Concert.] 

8. Are they real beings, the same as we ? [Concert.] 

9. Do they know anything about ns? [Concert.] 

10. Do they love us? [Concert] 

11. What makes you think that they love us, Charlie ? 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 5 

12. How many can tell where God and Jesns live? [Hands are 
raised]. Mary may tell. 

13. Where is heaven, Clara? 

14. Do God and Jesus live in the country or in a city ? [Concert.] 

15. Is this city a dirty, smoky place, like some of the cities we see 
here ? — What do you think about it, Emma ? 

16. What is built around this city ? [Concert.] 

17. What is this wall made of, Minnie? 

18. What kind of stones are they, Bennie ? — Are they rough and 
dull-looking, like the stones we see in the field ? How do they look ? 
[Bennie answers.] 

19. Have any of you ever seen such stones? (Give the children an 
opportunity to tell what they have seen). Some of you may have seen 
stones something like those in this wall, but they are not common. 
They are very costly, and are seldom used except in ear-rings, and breast- 
pins, and other jewelry. Sometimes people pay hundreds of dollars for a 
stone no larger than a kernel of corn. 

20. The city in heaven is square, and the wall has four sides, like 
this. (Teacher steps to the blackboard and encloses a square.) Each 
side is several hundred miles long. Do n't you think it must be very 
beautiful, made of such lovely stones ? 

21. Are there any gates in this wall ? [Concert.] 

22. How many, Clyde? (He does not know.) Who can tell? 
[Hands up.] Susie may answer. [Answer given.] Yes, there are 
twelve gates, three on each side. (Teacher erases parts of the lines, 
making three openings on each side of the square.) 

23. How many can tell of what these gates are made ? [Hands 
up.] Glen may answer. 

24. Have any of you ever seen a pearl? (Glen answers, "Yes, 
ma'am, my sister has a pen-knife with a pearl handle.") Yes, we see 
many things made of pearl, but this pearl is not like that of which our 
lesson speaks. Real pearls are very costly, and much more beautiful 
than the pearl we see so often. Real pearls are put in rings and neck- 
laces sometimes, but only very rich people can buy them. Some day 
when we have more time, I will tell you where we get our pearls. 

25. Are there houses in heaven ? [Concert.] 

26. Of what are they made ? [Concert.] Yes, and they are called 
mansions. 

27. What are mansions? — Can any of you tell? [Clara answers.] 
Yes, mansions are very grand houses, but those in heaven must be much 
more beautiful than the very nicest ones we see here. Do n't you think 



D SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

so ? The gold we see here is bright and beautiful, but that in heaven is 
much more lovely. The Bible says it is so clear one can see through it. 

28. Of what are the streets in this city made ? [Concert.] Of gold ! 
what! covered with gold all over? Xo dirt to be seen? [Concert.] 
What a beautiful place ! — walls glittering with lovely stones, some blue, 
some green, some red ; houses of shining gold, and golden streets ! 
And just to think, children, God has promised that we may live in this 
city sometime if we will only do right. Jesus has been making these 
beautiful mansions ready for us that when we go to heaven we may have 
them to live in. And then, too, if we ever reach heaven, we will be 
with God and Jesus. "Would n't you like to see them and to live with 
them always ? 

29. Is there any river in heaven, Mary? [Answer.] Yes, and it is 
called the River of Life. Can you remember that name? 

30. What grows on each side of the river ? [Concert.] 

31. What is the name of this tree, George ? 

32. How could one tree grow on both sides of the river ? — Did you 
ever think of that ? Perhaps it is something like this. (Teacher puts a 
few marks on the board representing a tree with two trunks and one top. 
a river passing between the trunks.) This would be one tree, and still 
it would be on both sides of the river, would it not ? 

33. What does the fruit on this tree look like, Charlie ? 

34. How often does the fruit ripen, Emma ? [Answer given.] We 
have never seen such fruit, have we ? 

35. Are there any beings in heaven besides God and Jesus ? [Con- 
cert.] What are they called ? [Concert.] 

36. How many angels are there ? [Concert.] 

37. Are they happy ? [Concert.] 

38. What makes them so happy, Minnie ? 

39. Tes, they are never sick, and they never have any trouble, and 
they have a lovely home ; and besides they are always good. All good 
people are happy, are they not? [Concert.] Are you not happy when 
you are good? [Concert] 

40. Is there any music in heaven ? [Concert.] 

41. Who makes it? [Concert.] 

42. What do they play upon ? (Here show the class the picture of 
a harp, being careful to tell them that the harps in heaven are much 
nicer than ours, and must make music sweeter and grander than any 
that has ever been heard on this earth. ) 

43. Is there any night in heaven? [Concert.] Anything to hurt 
people, or make them afraid? [Concert.] How many of this class, I 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 7 

wonder, will sometime live hi this beautiful place, with God and Jesus 
and the angels. Do you ever think about it ? You all want to go there, 
do you not ? What must we do, Bennie, if we ever reach that beautiful 
home ? 

Note.— The Model Lessons are not intended for actual use. They are given 
simply as illustrations. 

LESSON III. 

Gen. 1:1-19; Ps. 33 : 5-9 ; Job 26 : 7-14. In the recitation of this 
lesson it will be well to talk with the class about the use of light, air. 
water, trees, etc. Show how necessary these things are for our comfort 
and existence. Direct the mind to God's goodness in giving us all these 
blessings. 

This lesson cau be easily illustrated. To represent the earth, draw 
a large circle upon the blackboard. The space thus enclosed will pict- 
ure the condition of the earth when it was dark and covered with 
water ; to represent the third day's work, take crayon of a dark brown 
color, and picture portions of land in the water. Then let the children 
take the green crayon and make grass and trees upon the land. Have 
the trees of different kinds. One child can make an apple-tree, another 
an evergreen, etc. To represent the sun, use yellow crayon, and place 
outside the circle a ball with rays diverging from it. Little crosses 
placed here and there will do for the stars. 

Leave the picture on the board until the next day. See General 
Instruction, Nos. 10, 11. 

LESSON IV. 

Gen. 1:20-31; 2:18-25. Continue the practical thoughts of the 
last lesson, making very prominent God's goodness in his work of crea- 
tion. Also impress the class with his greatness. Talk with the chil- 
dren in a pleasant, informal way about animals, calling attention to the 
different kinds, their uses, and the benefit they are to man; in this way 
showing God's love for us. If it is thought desirable to illustrate the 
lesson, continue the picture. Let the children place birds in the air and 
trees, fish in the water, and beasts upon the land. Have the class 
name different kinds of animals, and represent them in the drawing. 
After this has been done, let some child make a picture of Adam, plac- 
ing him by the side of a lion. This will show the children that animals 
were then tame and gentle. 

LESSON V. 

Gen. 2:1-3; Ex. 20 : 8-11 ; 31 : 12-17 ; Isa. 58 : 13, 14. Make this 
lesson purely practical. Lead the class out to express their ideas about 
different points of the lesson. Let them tell why God gave the Sabbath, 



b SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

and how it should be kept. Then give additional ideas, and show 
how reasonable and right it is that we should spend one day every 
week thinking about God, who has done so much for us. Awaken the 
conscience on this subject, and so impress the children that they will 
keep the Sabbath better in the future. 

It may be well to make the next lesson a review of the first five. 

REVIEW LESSOX (Model). 

WESSONS I-Y. 

1. What is the best book in the world? — How many can tell ? 
[Hands are raised.] Charlie, what is it? 

2. How many can tell what the Bible talks about? [Hands up. 
Call on different pupils for an answer.] 

3. Are Bible stories always true? [Answer given in concert.] 

4. Mary, who gave us the Bible ? Did he write it himself? Who 
did write it ? [Mary answers all these questions.] 

5. Is God a real, living being? [Concert.] 

6. Does he live upon this earth ? [Concert.] 

7. Where does he live ? [Concert.] 

8. Where is heaven, Claud ? 

9. Does God care for us ? [Concert.] What makes you think so, 
Fannie? 

l'J. How many can think of something that God has given you ? 
[Hands up. Call on different pupils.] 

11. Does God love children ? What kind of children? [Concert,] 

12. Does God know when we do wrong? Can he see us ? Can he 
hear us talk ? Does he know what we are thinking about ? [Each an- 
swer given iu concert.] 

13. Don't you think we ought always to please God because of what 
he has done for us ? [Concert.] 

14. Who can tell us something about God's home? [Hands up. 
Call on different pupils until the principal things are described.] 

15. Are there any beings in heaven besides God and Christ ? [Con- 
cert] What are they called ? [Concert.] 

16. What kind of beings are the angels, Willie ? Are they happy ? 
What makes them so happy ? [Willie gives these answers.] 

17. Would you like to live with the angels in their beautiful home ? 
Can we all live there sometime if we do right ? Who has made us this 
promise? [Answers given in concert.] 

18. Who made this world, Nora? Who helped him? [Nora an- 
swers.] 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 9 

19. How did the earth look at first, Glen ? 

20. How long did it take God to make the earth and everything 
upon it ? [Concert.] 

21. What did he make on the first day ?— Hands up ; let us see how 
many know. [Hands are raised.] Frank, you may tell. 

•22. How many know what was made on the second day ? [Hands 
up.] Fannie, what was it '? 

23. What did God make on the third day? [Hands up.] Charlie 
may tell. [Incorrect answer.] 

24. Is that right, class ? [Concert.] What do you think was made 
on the third day, Willie? [Correct answer.] How many agree with 
Willie ? [Hands up.] Yes, that is right. You will not forget that 
again, will you, Charlie ? 

25. What did God put in the sky on the fourth day ? [Concert.] 

26. What kind of animals did God make first?— Mary, can you 
tell ? [Answer given.] On what day did he make them ? [Mary answers.] 

27. What did God make the next day, Nora ? 

28. Did he not make something besides the beasts ? [Concert.] 
What was it, Claud ? 

29. What name did God give to the first man ? [Concert.] Of what 
was Adam made? [Concert.] 

30. Did Adam look like the men we see now, Frank ? 

31. Did Adam always live alone with the beasts, Glen ? 

32. What did the Lord make to be company for him and to help 
him ? 

33. What did Adam call his wife? [Concert.] Was he pleased 
with her? [Concert.] 

34. Who can give the name of the first day of the week ? [Hands 
up. Call for an answer.] What, then, did God make on Sunday? 
What name is given to the second day of the week? Then, what did 
God make on Monday ? What is the third day of the week ? What 
did God make on Tuesday ? What is the fourth day ? What, then, was 
made on Wednesday ? What is the fifth day ? What was made that 
day ? Which is the sixth day ? What, then, was made on Friday ? 
[Answers given in concert.] 

35. What did God do on the seventh day ? Which is the seventh 
day ? What other name did God give to the seventh day ? [Answers given 
in concert.] 

36. Why did the Lord rest, Fannie ? —Was he tired ? [Fannie 
answers.] 

37. Does God want us to rest on the seventh day ? [Concert.] 



10 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

38. What should we think about during the Sabbath day, Mary ? 

39. Why does God want us to spend this day thinking about him, 
Charlie ? 

40. Would you like to have God forget you ? [Concert.] 

41. What would become of you, do you suppose, if he should?— 
What do you think about it, Willie ? 

42. Do n't you think it very wicked to forget God, when he always 
remembers us, and cares for us ? [Concert.] 

43. Don't you think we ought to remember him every day, and 
every day thank him for his goodness to us ? [Concert.] Yes, we 
should never forget God. He has been very kind to us. He has done 
more for us than our best friends, or even our parents ; and we should 
love him with all our hearts, and every day try to please him. 

Note.— In conducting a review, it will not be necessary to use illustrations. 

LESSON VI. 

Gen. 2 : 4-17. Present to the class the happy condition of Adam and 
Eve in Eden. Refer to different things that grew in the garden, and to 
the animals placed there, noticing their uses and beauty, and the 
pleasure and comfort they must have given the holy pair ; thus making 
prominent God's goodness toward them. Impress the children with the 
idea that because of such great kindness and love, Adam and Eve ought 
always to have loved and obeyed him. Do not refer to their disobedi- 
ence in this lesson. Notice that work was given to Adam and Eve as 
one means of increasing their happiness. 

A drawing on the blackboard will nicely illustrate this lesson. 
Inclose quite a large surface, and let it represent the garden of Eden. 
Place a river in the garden, as described in Gen. 2 : 10. Let the pupils 
name different kinds of fruit-trees, flowers, and vines, and represent them 
in the picture. Make the tree of knowledge very prominent, aDd also 
the tree of life. Next place in the drawing different kinds of animals, 
such as the children may suggest, and then represent Adam and Eve at 
work in the garden. 

LESSON VII. 

Gen. 3 : 1-7. An excellent opportunity is here given to teach the 
lesson of obedience. Particular attention should be given to the fact 
that Eve was looking at the forbidden fruit and no doubt was wondering 
why God had told them not to touch it, thus putting herself in the way 
of temptation. An application of this lesson may be made, teaching 
the children to flee from temptation and to resist the first step in a 
wrong direction. 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 11 

Notice, too, that Eve was not content with her great blessings, but 
wanted to be as wise as her Maker. Also call attention to the sin of 
Adam in doing wrong to please one he loved, and from his example let 
the children draw a practical lesson for themselves. Show how great the 
sin of Adam and Eve was. considering all that had been done for them. 

LESSON VIII. 

Gen. 3 : 14, 15 ; 2 Peter 2:4; Rev. 12 : 7-9 ; Job 2 : 1, 2 : 1 Peter 5 : 8, 
9 : Jude 6. Present Satan in his true character. Show the children 
that he is the cause of all trouble and sin, and impress them with the fact 
that he is a real, living being. Help the children to realize his power 
over them, and compare their weakness with his might. Show them how 
impossible it is to resist Satan in their own strength, and point them to 
God for the help which they so much need. 

LESSON IX. 

Gen. 3 : 8-24. Notice, 1. That wrong-doing brings unhappiness, 
and shame, and a fear of those who are good ; 2. That God could see 
Adam and Eve, and knew all they were doing, although he was not seen 
by them ; 3. That the love of God and of his Son toward Adam and Eve 
was very great. Make a personal application of these three points. 

LESSON X. 

Gen. 4 : 1-18 ; Heb. 11 : 4 ; 1 John 3 : 12 ; Gen. 4 : 25, 26 ; 5 : 1-5. 
Make plain the use of offerings, and show that Christ offered to die 
for us as well as for Adam and Eve. Dwell upon the love of God and 
of Christ toward us. Teach the children to love God because he first 
loved them. Show them that Christ is greater than Satan, and able to 
deliver them from his power if they will only be obedient and love him 
with all their hearts. 

Cain did not think it necessary to obey God in every particular. 
Show the sinfulness of such a course, and also help the children to real- 
ize how dangerous and wicked it is to harbor jealous feelings. Impress 
them with the idea that one wicked act leads to another. 

This lesson can be illustrated by a drawing if thought best. 

For the next recitation, review lessons 6-10. 

LESSON XL 

Gen. 5 : 18-32 : 6 : Heb. 11 : 5 ; Jude 14. Talk with the children 

about their grandfathers, comparing their ages with that of Noah's 

grandfather. Picture in the mind the glories of heaven, and the holy 

character of God and the angels, and show how good and holy Enoch 



12 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

must have been to be worthy of translation. It was only by Christ's 
help that he was enabled to live such a righteous life, and teach the 
children that the Saviour is just as willing to help them as he was to 
help Enoch. 

LESSON XII. 

Gen. 6 ; 7 : 1-10 ; 2 Peter 2:5. Compare the size of the ark with 
something the children can see. It was at least 450 feet long, 75 feet 
wide, and 45 feet high. 

Several good thoughts can be drawn from this lesson. One is that 
ridicule should never turn us from doing what God has commanded. 
Another is that we should believe God and obey him, whether any one 
else does or not. 

Perhaps the pictures in the book will sufficiently illustrate this 
lesson. If not, a drawing can be put upon the blackboard. 

LESSON XIII. 
Gen. 7 : 11-24. Draw largely upon the imagination of the class in 
this recitation. Let them express their ide.ss in regard to Noah's arrange- 
ment of things in the ark, and in regard to the behavior of the wicked 
people outside. Present to the class the awfulness of the scene, and 
show that it was only by God's care that the ark was kept from harm. 
See General Instruction, .Nos. 12, 14. 

LESSON XIV. 

Gen. 8 ; 9 : 1-17. Speak of God's goodness in preserving Noah and 
his family, and call attention to the fact that the offerings which he 
made showed his gratitude toward God and his faith in Christ. 

In referring to the rainbow, notice the fact that God is faithful 
to keep his promise. So we should be careful to do as we promise. 
Review lessons 11-14. 

LESSON XV. 

Gen. 11 : 1- '. Show the children that God was displeased with the 
people of Babel because of their pride in wanting people to hear of them, 
and speak well of them. Let the children apply this idea to their own 
lives. Also show them how impossible it is to get beyond God's power 
and control, and impress the thought that God knows all we do and say, 
and can do with us as he thinks best. This lesson can easily be 
illustrated by a drawing or by the use of blocks. 

LESSON XVI. 
Gen. 11 : 27-32 : 12 ; 13. Let the children describe a tent, and then 
tell them how Abraham and Lot lived while tending their flocks and 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 13 

herds. If possible consult some Bible history or commentary on the 
subject of pastoral life. 

The following practical lessons should be brought out and applied: — 

1. To obey quickly and pleasantly, without stopping to ask ques- 
tions, is pleasing to God. 

2. Selfishness is a sin in God's sight, hut kindness and generosily 
he approves aud will reward. 

3. It is not best to choose wicked people for our companions, unless 
by so doing we can make them better. 

LESSOX XVII. 

Gen. 14. Consult some Bible history or commentary for a descrip- 
tion of Abraham's wealth. Dwell upon Abraham's kindness to Lot. 
Show how rich he was, and in this way impress the children with the 
thought that God always cares for those who are generous and kind to 
others. 

Xotice that Abraham took tithes for the Lord, although he would 
not take anything for himself. 

Let the class see that Lot would not have been carried away from 
his home had he not chosen to live among the wicked people of Sodom. 

LESSOX XYIII. 

Gen. 18. Make prominent Abraham's kindness to the strangers, 
and show the children that they should follow his example. Xotice 
again Abraham's love and care for others, as shown in his plea for 
Sodom. 

Describe the butter used in those days. In regard to the custom of 
washing the feet, and for a description of sandals and butter, see Bible 

dictionary. 

LESSOX XIX. 

Gen. 19 : 1-14. Xotice again the politeness shown to strangers. 
Describe the manner of greeting customary in olden times. Consider 
the motives which may have led Lot to take up his residence in the city. 
Read some commentary on Gen. 19 : 1-3. See Bible dictionary on 
•"bowing." 

LESSOX XX. 

Gen. 19 : 15-30. Picture to the mind as far as possible the true 
condition of Sodom, that the children may see God's justice in destroy- 
ing it. Also make prominent God's love and mercy in saving Lot and 
his family. Give the children a chance to express their ideas about 
Lot's hesitancy in leaving the city. Show the results of disobedience, 



14 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

taking Lot's wife for an example. Compare the condition of Lot at 
this time with that of his prosperous uncle, and let the class draw 
their own conclusions as to the cause of the great difference. 

LESSON XXI. 

Gen. 22:1-19; Heb. 11 : 17-19. The lesson of obedience should 

again be made prominent. Abraham obeyed God; and Isaac, although 

about twenty- five years of age, did not resist his father. Isaac's trust 

and faith in his father may be used to illustrate Abraham's faith in God. 

LESSON XXII. 

Gen. 25:19-34; 27:1-29. Explain more fully the occupations of 
Jacob and Esau. Show that the deception practiced by Jacob and his 
mother was very cruel indeed, and that God was much displeased with 
them. Teach the children that it is wicked to be deceitful. 

A Bible dictionary should be consulted in reference to "birthright," 
and "blessing," in order that the nature of a blessing may be described 
as may seem necessary. 

LESSON XXIII. 

Gen. 27 : 30-46 ; 28 : 1-15 ; Heb. 12 : 15-17 ; Kev. 21 : 8, 27. Speak 
again of deceit and falsehood. Impress the children with the fact that 
these things are very wrong in God's sight, and tell them what is to 
become of all liars. Let them see that deceit is closely akin to lying, 
and that they are in great danger on this point. 

Present the severity of the punishment sent upon Jacob and iiebekah, 
but at the same time show God's kindness and love in appearing to 
Jacob. See General Instruction, No. 13. 

LESSON XXLV. 
Gen. 28 : 16-22 ; Prov. 19 : 17 ; Matt. 25 : 34-40 ; Gen. 29 : 1-14. 
Make this a practical lesson on giving to the Lord. Teach the children 
to be liberal, especially in God's service, and show how good it is to 
give to the Lord when he has done so much for us. Awaken enthusiasm 
on this subject, and let the children know that God is just as much 
pleased with their small gifts as he is with the greater ones which 
their parents may give. Inspire a spirit of self-denial, and suggest 
different ways in which the children can sacrifice and work for the Lord. 
See General Instruction, Nos. 13, 14. 

LESSON XXY. 
Gen. 29 : 15-30 ; 31 : 25-43. Describe Jacob's trials and hardships. 
Show that means of communication in those days were very limited, and 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 15 

that probably Jacob seldom, if ever, heard from his home during those 
twenty years. Notice God's care for Jacob. 

LESSON XXVI. 

Gen. 32 ; 33 ; 35. Give the children some idea of Jacob's wealth, as 
shown by his large flocks and herds. Describe the manner of traveling 
in those days. Impress the thought that although God cared for Jacob, and 
made him a very rich man, still he let him suffer both in body and in mind 
because of his sin. Notice Jacob's first prayer after hearing that Esau 
was coming to meet him. He was then in great distress, fearing that 
Esau intended to kill him. A little later Jacob was alone pleading with 
the angel, and the burden of his prayer then was that God would forgive 
him his sin. In his first prayer he pleaded for his life ; but in the second, 
he felt his guilt, and he would not rest content until he was assured of 
God's forgiveness. 

Notice God's love and mercy in changing Esau's intentions, and in 
bringing about so friendly a meeting of the long-separated brothers. 

Another evidence of Jacob's great wealth is the present which he 
gave to Esau. It included over five hundred animals, and no doubt 
was only a small part of his flocks and herds. Keview lessons 15-26. 

LESSON XXVII. 

Gen. 36 : 6-8 ; 37 : 1-20. Call attention to the fact that Jacob and 
Esau were shepherds, and let the children tell what they know about the 
customs and life of such men. 

Joseph was his father's favorite because he was better and more 
obedient than his brothers. Let the children draw a practical lesson 
from this fact. 

Notice Joseph's cheerful obedience in going to find his brothers. 
The task was no doubt tiresome for one of his age. Also refer to the 
successive changes that took place in the minds of the brothers ; unwill- 
ingness to do right, jealousy, and hatred. 

LESSON XXVIII. 

Gen. 37 : 21-36. Refer to the result of harboring jealousy and 
hatred, as shown by the lives of Joseph's brothers. 

Spend a few moments telling the children about the merchants of 
olden times, and about the way they transported their goods ; and also 
give the class some idea of the slavery into which Joseph was sold. 
See Bible dictionary and commentary. 



lb SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

LESSON XXIX. 

Gen. 39 ; 40 ; Ps. 105 : 17-19. Let the children tell what they know 
about prisons, and give additional facts which may be of interest. 
Perhaps a description of ancient Egyptian prisons can be given. 

Impress the thought that although Joseph was in great trouble, still 
he did not complain, but made himself cheerful and contented by doing 
good to others. 

It will be of interest to the children to know what was required of a 
king's baker and butler. See Bible dictionary. If time will permit, it 
may be well to give the servants' dreams. 

LESSON XXX. 

Gen. 41 : 1-45 ; Ps. 105 : 20-22 ; Acts 7 : 10. Describe the magicians 
of ancient times. See Bible dictionary. Notice Joseph's humility 
when brought before the king. Call attention to the fact that God was 
caring for Joseph, and that it was he who brought about all these 
changes in Joseph's life. 

LESSON XXXI. 

Gen. 41 : 46-57 ; 42:1-5: Acts 32 : 11, 12. Let the children tell 
what they know about famines, and then describe some famine, and 
the trouble and suffering caused by it. 

God had an object in permitting Joseph to be sent to Egypt. Perhaps 
he wished to save Jacob and his family from the coining dearth. Let 
the children express their ideas on this subject. Describe the corn 
of Egypt. See Bible dictionary. 

LESSON XXXII. 
Gen. 42 : 6-20. Make plain the motive Joseph had in treating his 

brothers as he did. 

LESSON XXXIII. 

Gen. 42 : 21-38 ; 43 : 1-14. Sin brings a troubled conscience, as 
shown by the remarks of Jacob's sons. Some good applications may be 
made when speaking to the children on this subject. 

LESSON XXXIY. 

Gen. 43 : 15-34 ; 44 : 1-3. Notice the kind and tender feeling which 
Joseph had toward his brothers. 

The Egyptians would not eat with foreigners, and this accounts for 
the fact that Joseph did not eat with his brothers. Describe, as far as 
can be easily understood, the use of Joseph's silver cup. See Bible 
commentary. 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 17 

LESSON XXXV. 
Gen. 44 : 4-17. Refer again to the troubled conscience. "Servants,*' 
as here used, applies to persons owned by their masters, and not hired. 

LESSON XXXVI. 

Gen. 44 : 18-34 ; 45 : 1-24. Make prominent Joseph's forgiving 
spirit. 

Joseph said that God had sent him to Egypt. Do not let the 
children get the idea that God made the brothers do a wicked deed, but 
show that he permitted the action, and afterward brought good out of it 
because of his care for Jacob and his family. 

Notice the care and love which the brothers manifested for their 

father at this time, as shown by Judah's tender plea in his father's 

behalf. 

LESSON XXXVII. 

Gen. 45 : 25-28 ; 46 : 1-7, 28-34 ; 47 ; 50 : 1-14. Picture to the mind 
the anxiety Jacob must have felt while his sons were away. 

Jacob and his sons were given homes in the country because they 
were shepherds and needed much pasture. 

Notice the honor shown Jacob at his burial. 

LESSON XXXVIII. 
Gen. 50 : 14-26. Consult some good Bible commentary or dictionary 
for a description of the gods of Egypt and of the manner of embalming 
the dead in that country. Review lessons 27-38. Perhaps two days will 
be needed in this review. 

LESSON XXXIX. 
Ex. 1 ; 2 : 1-4 ; Acts 7 : 17-20. See General Instruction, No. 12. 

LESSON XL. 

Ex. 2 : 5-9. Teach the children that God was directing in all the 

events of Moses' early life. Refer to Miriam's faithfulness in watching 

her brother. 

LESSON XLL 

Ex. 2 : 10 ; Acts 7 : 21, 22 : Heb. 11 : 23-26 ; Ex. 6 : 16, 18, 20. Show 
the class the picture of a king's palace, and give a description of it. 
Give the children some idea of the life Moses must have led while 
with the king's daughter. Notice that Moses always gave heed to what 
his mother had taught him, although separated from her and surrounded 
by great temptations. 



18 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 



LESSON XLII. 



Ex. 2 : 11-25 : 3 : 1-6 ; Acts T : 23-31 : Heb. 11 : 27. In taking the 
part of the Israelites, and in protecting the women at the well, Moses 
exemplified the principle of standing for the right and of helping the 
persecuted and weak. Children in their association with one another 
have many opportunities of acting upon this principle. Help them to 
make some practical applications. 

Impress the idea that Moses cared more for the approbation of God 
than for all the honors of Egypt. Compare his home in Midian with his 
home in Egypt. 

Although seemingly left to himself for forty years, Moses was still 
in God's care and under his direction. 

Refer to the custom o£ removing the shoes when entering a holy 
place. 

LESSON XLIIL 

Ex. 3 : 7-22 ; 4 : 1-18 : Acts 7 : 35. Although God sometimes per- 
mits his children to suffer, still he loves and cares for them, as shown in 
the case of the Israelites. 

Describe the leprosy. See cyclopaedia. 

Moses said he had a -'slow tongue." Some think that he referred to 
an impediment in his speech, while others think he had reference to his 
having forgotten the language of Egypt. Notice Moses' humility, but 
show the children that God is not pleased when people hesitate to 
do as he commands them. 

LESSON XLIT. 

Ex. 4 : 27-31 ; 5. If time will permit, bring in additional points of 
history as found in the references. 

It may be well to make the next recitation a review of lessons 39-41. 

LESSON XLV. 

Ex. 7 ; 8 : 1-15 : Ps. 105 : 27, 29, 30. The Egyptians worshiped the 
river and frogs, and so God showed himself to be greater than the gods 
of Egypt when he sent the plagues spoken of in this lesson. 

Refer to Pharaoh's promises which were made to obtain a present 
good, and then were unheeded. A good lesson may be taught the 
children on this subject, for they are apt to make promises in the same 
way. 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 19 

LESSON XLVI. 
Ex. 8 : 16-32 ; Ps. L05 : 31. Tlie Egyptians were a very cleanly 
people, and so these plagues caused them much trouble. 
Flies or beetles were also gods of the Egyptians. 

LESSON XL VII. 

Ex. 9; Ps. 105:32, 33; 78:47-49. Cattle were worshiped by the 
Egyptians. 

The people of Egypt were not accustomed to rain. Their land was 
watered by irrigation, and the storm spoken of in this lesson must have 
caused great fear, as they had never before seen anything like it. 

LESSON XLV1I1. 
Ex. 10 : Ps. 105 : 34, 35, 28 ; 78 : 46. Keep before the minds of the 
children the object God had in sending the plagues. He wished to show 
the idolaters of that land that he was the only true God. Notice God's 
care in preserving his people from tne most of the plagues. 

LESSON XLIX. 
Ex. 12. The Israelites were commanded to do certain things 
during the night of the Passover. Perhaps they did not see any reason 
or virtue in what they did ; however, they would have suffered had they 
not obeyed. So with children in their relation to God and to their 
parents : it is for their good to obey, although they may not see why 
they should do so. 

LESSON L. 

Ex. 11 ; 13 : 1-22. Picture to the imagination the feelings of the 
Egyptians and the Israelites during that fearful night, and compare the 
condition of God's people with that of their masters. Keview lessons 
45-50. 

LESSON LI. 

Ex. 13 : 20-22; 14; 15 : 1-21; Ps. 106 : 9-12. In order that the 
children may get a clear idea of the situation of the Israelites when 
by the sea, make a simple drawing representing their position with 
respect to the mountains, the sea, and Pharaoh's host. Let the children 
see how impossible it was for the people to escape, and then they can 
better appreciate God's power and mercy. The Israelites were grateful 
for their deliverance, so we should be grateful for God's help. 

LESSON LIT. 
Ex. 15 : 22-27 ; 16 ; Num. 11:7-9; Ps. 78 : 23-25. No doubt the class 
will say at once that it was wrong for the Israelites to complain when 



20 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

the Lord was doing so much for them. Help the children to see that 
their blessings are greater than those of the Israelites, and that a spirit 
of murmuring and discoid is as wicked now as it was in the time of 
the Israelites. Notice particularly God's respect for his holy day. 

LESSON L1II. 

Ex. IT ; 18. Compare the condition of the Israelites in the wilder- 
ness with their condition when in Egypt, and then the children will see 
that they had no reason to complain or to wish themselves back in 
Egypt. Notice God's tender care for his people in giving them food and 
water, although they murmured against him. 

When reference is made to battles, dwell as little as possible upon 
the fighting, giving more attention to the causes and results, and other 
circumstances connected with them. 

LESSON LIT. 

Ex. 19 ; 20 : 21 : 1-6. When God requested the Israelites to meet 
him at the mount, he commanded them to wash their clothes, etc. A 
good lesson may be drawn from this in regard to cleanliness. 

In this lesson the commaudments are given in an abbreviated form. 
If the children can learn them as given in the Bible, it will be better to 
have them do so. 

Explain the meaning and scope of each commandment as far as 
may seem practicable. Children often have a very limited idea of these 
precepts. 

LESSON LV. 

Ex. 24:9-18; 32: Deut. 9:8-21. Bring out additional points as 
found in the texts. Notice that Moses' anger was not like that which 
we see so commonly manifested. 

The people had promised the Lord that they would obey all his 
commandments, and had agreed that if they did not do so they should 
be destroyed. Notice in t lis and in following similar circumstances, 
that God was very merciful to his people, and did not destroy them all as 
they had said should be done. 

LESSON LVL 

Ex. 31 : 1-9, 29-35 ; 35 : 3(3 : 37 : 38. The children will now be able to 
see why God told his pe)ple to ask the Egyptians for jewels of gold 
and silver. As the Israelites gave willingly for the tabernacle, so we 
should gladly give for the service of the Lord. 

Illustrate the tabernacle and its furniture either by a drawing or by 
objects. 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 21 



LESSOX LVII. 



Ex. 39 : 1-31 ; 40 ; Num. 2. Continue the illustration of the preced- 
ing lesson. 

LESSOX LVIII. 

Num. 10:33-3": 11; 12. Xotice again that God is not pleased 
when we complain and find fault with what he gives us. A good lesson 
can also be drawn from the experience of Miriam, in regard to jealousy 
and evil speaking, and from the forgiving spirit of Moses as shown in 
his prayer for his sister. 

LESSOX LIX. 

Num. 13; 14:1-38; Deut. 1:22-40. Make plain God's reason for 
driving out the people of Canaan. 

Caleb and Joshua believed that the Lord would help them as he had 
promised; the other spies did not believe. God was pleased with the 
one spirit and not with the other. A good lesson can be drawn here, 
showing the children that God is pleased to have them believe that he 
will do for them all he has promised. Perhaps it will be well to talk 
about some of God's promises, making them a reality to the children. 

Xotice the exaggerated statements of the ten spies, and make a 
practical application in regard to this evil habit. 

LESSOX LX. 

Num. 14 : 39-45 ; Deut. 1 : 41-46 ; Num. 16. The Israelites were 
willing to obey the Lord, simply that they might escape punishment. 
God was not pleased with such a motive. A good lesson can be drawn 
here for the children. 

Xotice again the spirit of jealousy and fault-finding, and the way 
God regards such things, as shown by the punishment which he sent 
upon his people. Also refer to the forgiving spirit of Moses and Aaron in 
praying for the people. 

LESSOX LXI. 

Num. 17 ; 20 : l-lo ; Deut. 1 : 37. God cannot overlook sin in any 
one. If he was so displeased with Moses and Aaron because of their 
impatience and hasty words, how must he regard our daily actions and 
words ? Apply this thought to the lives of the children, but at the same 
time show them how willing God is to forgive if we truly repent as did 
Moses and Aaron. 



22 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

LESSOX LXII. 
Num. 20 : 2 2-29 ; 21 : 1-9 ; Dent. 8 : 15. Impress the thought that 
the time to be kind to people is while they are with us, and then when 
they are absent from us or are dead, we shall not have to regret our 
wicked actions toward them. Xotice again God's displeasure when 
people find fault with what he gives them. Make a practical application. 
Call attention also to the fact that we must do just as God has com- 
manded if we would hope to be saved. 

LESSON LXIII. 

Num. 22 : 1-20. In this lesson can be taught the principle of 
willing and unquestioned obedience to those who know what is best 
for us. 

LESSON LX1Y. 

Xum. 22 : 21-41 : 23 ; 24 : 31 : 8. Continue the practical thoughts 
of the last lesson, noticing the gradual change in Balaam, from bad to 
worse. The children can then see that one who is allowed to have his 
own way will not only bring ruin to himself here, but will be shut out 
of heaven at last. 

LESSOX LXY. 

Deut. 1-3: 30: 31. Xotice Moses' willingness to submit to the 
Lord without murmur or complaint. He did not try to lay his sin on 
the people and so shield himself. He loved the people, and was more 
anxious for their good and for the honor of the Lord than for any good 
that might come to him. Review lessons 51-65. 

LESSOX LXYI. 

Deut. 32 ; 34. Continue the thoughts of the last lesson. 

Although God could not overlook Moses' siu, still he showed him 
great love and honor, as shown by his burial and resurrection. Jude 9 ; 
Matt. 17:3. God is just, but his mercy and love overbalance all. 
Review the life of Moses for the next lesson. 

LESSOX LXYII. 

Joshua 1 ; 2. Describe the houses of those times, and the position 
of Rahab's dwelling, so that the children can get a better idea of the 
spies' hiding-plaoe, and of how they made their escape. 

God remembers any act of kindness done to one of his children, as 
this lesson shows. See Mark 9 : 41. 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 2o 

LESSON LXY1LI. 

Joshua 3; 4; 5:1-12. God performed wonderful miracles for the 
Israelites, and gave them a good land ; but he does just as great things 
for us every day, and our blessings are more numerous. Help the 
children to see that this is true, and that because of this we should be 
very obedient and grateful. 

LESSON LX1X. 

Joshua 5:13-15; 6. The following points should receive special 
notice : 1. Wherever God is, there reverence should be shown ; 2. • When 
God is for us, nothing can stand against us ; 3. If we wish to have God 
help us, we must do just as he says. 

LESSON LXX. 
Joshua 7 ; 8 : 1-29. Apply the following practical lessons : 1. No 
one can deceive God; 2. God cannot help us when we are connected 
with sin ; 3. Theft and deception are grievous sin6. 

LESSON LXXI. 

Joshua 9. Describe the wine bottles of those times. See Bible 
dictionary. 

LESSON LXXII. 

Joshua 10 ; 11 ; 23 ; 24. If we are children of God, no one can do us 
harm, and God will do for us whatever we ask, if it is for our good. 
Review lessons 67-72. 

LESSON LXXIII. 

Judges 2-5. It is not safe to associate with the wicked, for we are 
liable to follow their example. Call attention to God's love and willing- 
ness to forgive whenever the people turned to him. 

LESSON LXXIV. 

Judges 6 : 1-35. This lesson shows that God is pleased with the 
humble, and chooses such to work for him. 

LESSON LXXV. 

Judges 6 : 36-40 ; 7 : 1-14. Continue the thoughts of the last lesson. 

We should never be afraid to do what is right, for no matter how 
small and weak we may be, the Lord will help us. 

The Lord is also pleased to have us take an interest in our work. 
and to be quick about it, as shown by his choice of Gideon's men at the 
brook. 



24 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 



LESSON LXXVI. 



Judges 7 : 15-25 : 8. As with Gideon, so •with us. After we have 
done all we can. the Lord will do tor us what we cannot do for ourselves. 

Explain the idea of faith so far as the children will be able to 
comprehend it. using Gideon's life as an example. 

LESSOX LXXYII. 

Euth 1. Like Ruth, we should choose to associate with those who 
are good. 

LESSOX LXXTI1I. 

Euth 2-4. A good lesson can be drawn from Ruth's industry and 
willingness to help her mother. Also kindness shown to others will give 
them comfort, and so make their work lighter, and will also bring favor 
to ourselves. Xotice too. that whenever any good comes to us. we 
should thank the Lord, as did Xaomi. 

LESSOX LXXIX. 
Judges 13 : 14 : 1-9. 

LESSOX LXXX. 

Judges 14 : 10-20 ; 15 : 1-9. Xotice the following : 1. We should not 
do wrong for fear of wicked people, as did Samson's wife : 2 . It is 
wrong to become angry : 3 . It is wrong to retaliate. 

Do not try to uphold Samson in any wicked action. When doing 
injury to the Philistines to avenge his own wrongs, he was sinning in 
God's sight, but when slaying them by the command of the Lord, he was 
simply doing the work that God had given him to do. 

LESSOX LXXXI. 

Judges 15 : 10-20 ; 10 : 1-21. We should not try to obtain the good 
will of the wicked by doing cruel or wicked deeds, as did the Israelites 
when they delivered Samson to the Philistines. 

Although a person may be naturally very wicked, aud many times 
do wrong, still the Lord will help him as long as he is trying to do 
right. 

Samson did wrong to deceive the woman ; he ought to have said 
nothing about the matter. 

Samson's strength was not in his hair, but in his obedience to the 
command of God in regard to it. 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 25 

LESSON LXXXri. 
Judges 16 : 22-31. As far as may seem best, describe the idolatrous 
worship of the Philistines, and show to the class pictures of idols. 
Review lessons 73-82. 

LESSON LXXX1II. 

1 Sam. 1 ; 2 ; 3 : 1-10. Samuel gives us a good example of cheerful 
obedience. God notices children, and has a loving care over them when 
they are good. 

LESSON LXXXIV. 

1 Sam. 3: 11-21; 4. Let the children see that parents are simply 
doing what God has commanded and what is for the good of their chil- 
dren, when they require obedience from them. 

We also see from this lesson that association with holy objects or 
with holy people will not keep us from harm when we are doing wrong. 

LESSON LXXXY. 

1 Sam. 5; 6 ; 7 : 1, 2. God cared for the ark when in danger; how 
much more will he care for his children in similar circumstances ! 

Notice the miraculous action of the cows in leaving their calves. 

God does not change his word, and he cannot excuse any forgetful- 
ness or carelessness on our part in regard to his commands. 

LESSON LXXXVI. 
1 Sam. 8. It is wrong fco follow the customs of the wicked people 
around us, when by so doing we displease the Lord. A lesson may also 
be drawn from the ingratitude of the Israelites in rejecting the Lord as 
their king. 

LESSON LXXXV1I. 
1 Sam. 9 ; 10 : 1-16. Saul did not wish to cause his father any anx- 
iety , — a good example for children. 

Explain the custom of anointing kings. Notice also Saul's modesty 
in not speaking of the honor that had been shown him. 
LESSON LXXXYIII. 
1 Sam. 10:17-27; 12. Refer again to Saul's retiring spirit. Teach 
the children that "handsome is, that handsome does." Notice God's 
willingness to help his people although they had rejected him. 

LESSON LXXXIX. 
1 Sam. 13. Children often try to excuse themselves for wrong-doing. 
From the events of this lesson, it will be seen that God makes no excus e 
for sin. 



26 . SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

LESSON XC. 

1 Sam. 15. Saul hoped to atone for his disobedience by making 
offerings ; so children sometimes try to atone for some act of disobedience 
by performing a good deed afterward. 

Saul did not confess his sin until it was found out, and then he con- 
fessed it only to Samuel. In order to obtain complete forgiveness of 
sin, we must confess to the Lord as well as to those around us, and our 
confession must be sincere. Review lessons 83-9 \ 

LESSON XCI. 

1 Sam. 16 : 1-13. When we see others doing wrong, we should be 
sorry for them, and try to have them do better, as did Samuel. 

Help the children to realize that God looks at the heart. 

Notice David's humility and faithfulness in continuing to care for 
his father's flocks. 

LESSON XCII. 

1 Sam. 16 : 11-23 ; 17 : 1-11. When we are cross, and ugly, and 
hard to please, we may know that God has left us, and that Satan is 
near. 

LESSON XCIII. 

1 Sam. 17:12-10. David's older brothers treated him in a very 
haughty, overbearing manner. A good lesson may be drawn from this 
circumstance, showing the children how to treat their younger brothers 
and sisters. Notice also that David was not irritated by the treatment 
which he received. Call attention to David's trust in God's help. 

LESSON XCIY. 

1 Sam. 17 : 41-58 ; 18 : 1-9, God helped David to defeat the giant, 
and so he will help us to overcome sins and evil habits if we only obey 
and trust him as David did. 

Children, as well as Saul, are sometimes jealous when they hear 
others praised more than they. Teach them that this spirit is wrong in 
God's sight. 

LESSON XCV. 

1 Sam. 18 : 10-30 ; 19 : 1-18. David was well thought of because 
he was good; so it is now, the children who do right are the ones we 
love. 

Jealousy makes people unhappy, and it leads to great evils, as shown 
in the case of Saul. 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 'It 

LESSON XCY1. 
1 Sam. 19 : 19-24 : 20. Jonathan was a good example for children 
to follow as far as unselfishness and true friendship are concerned. 
Many people in his position would have been jealous of David, but he 
had no such feeling. 

LESSON XCYII. 

1 Sam. 21 ; 22 : 1, 2, 9-2 *. God allows his people to have trouble, 

but he is always near to help them at such times, as is shown by Davids 

life. 

Call attention to the evil spirit of Doeg in bringing the priests into 

trouble, and draw a practical lesson for the children. 

LESSON XCVIII. 
1 Sam. 22 : 3-8 ; 23. The best way to forget our own trouble is to 
do something to help others, as did David ; and when we know that 
p eople are in trouble, it is right for us to visit them and comfort them as 
did Jonathan when he went to see David. We should never take sides 
w ith those who are trying to injure others, as was done by the wicked 
people who informed Saul of David's hiding-place. 

LESSON XCIX. 
1 Sam. 24 ; 25 : 1. In this lesson we have an excellent example of 
a forgiving spirit. Teach the children to cherish such a spirit at all 
times. Review Samuel's life. 

LESSON C. 
1 Sam. 25 : 2-44. Draw some practical lessons from the stinginess 
of Nabal, and from the generosity of his wife. Notice also that David 
decided it would be wrong to return evil for evil. 

LESSON CI. 

1 Sam. 26 : 27. Kindness shown to one who has injured us turns 
a way wrath and brings shame to our enemy. 

Wicked feelings can be smothered for a time, but unless they are 
completely rooted out of the heart, they will again manifest themselves. 

Notice again David's forgiving spirit. 

LESSON CII. 
1 Sam. 28 : 1, 2 : 29 : 30. When we are unjustly blamed or censured, 
we should follow David's example, and not allow ourselves to become 
angry. Refer to the cruelty of the man who left his servant by the way. 



28 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

LESSON Gin. 

1 Sam. 28 : 3-25. When the Lord is not with us, we have need to 
be afraid, as was Saul. When the Lord leaves us, we are led to do things 
that before would have seemed to us very wicked. 

LESSON CIY. 

1 Sam. 31; 2 Sam. 1; 1 Chron. 10. A kind act is never lost, as is 
shown by the circumstances connected with Saul's burial. David sor- 
rowed because of the harm that had befallen his enemy, thus showing 
that he had no evil feelings toward him. 

It is right to wish for the good will of others, but it is wrong to use 
wicked and unfair means to gain it. Review the life of Saul. 

LESSON CV. 

2 Sam. 2-6 ; 1 Chron. 13. When promises made to us are not ful- 
filled at the time or in the way that we expect, we should not complain 
and fret, but should wait patiently, as did David. 

LESSON CYI. 

2 Sam. 7 ; 2 Chron. 17. A lesson may be taught here in regard 
to the care of God's house. Children should know that they are dis- 
pleasing God when they deface or needlessly soil the house where God 
is worshiped. 

When required to give up some, cherished plan, we should do so 
cheerfully, as did David. 

David's chief interest and comfort was in working for the Lord ; so 

should it be with us. 

LESSON CVII. 

2 Sam. 9: 11; 12. We should, like David, seek out the unfort- 
unate, that we may do them good. 

No one in this world is so good but that he is in danger of doing 
wrong. 

To allow a person to be harmed when we can prevent it, is a great 
sin. 

Forgiveness of sin and punishment for sin often go together. This 
is God's plan, and it should be that of parents also. It is not unjust. 

LESSON CYIII. 
2 Sam. 13 : 14 ; 15 : 1-23. When one person becomes so angry 
with another that he will not speak to him, there is great danger that 
greater evils will follow. 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS 2?> 

Absalom sought the good will of others, but he had evil motives. A 
person may appear ever so good, but if there is evil in his heart, it will 
show itself sometime. 

Children can be the cause of great sorrow to their parents. 

LESSON CIX. 
2 Sam. 15 : 24-37 : 16 ; 17 : 1-21. We are taught by the example of 
David to take no notice of taunting and abusive language addressed to 
us, and also to have a submissive spirit when receiving punishment for 
our wrongs, — two good lessons for children to learn. 

LESSON CX. 
2 Sam. 17 : 21-29 ; 18 ; 19 : 1-8. In this lesson wo are taught to 
be liberal toward those who are in trouble and need our help. 

As David disliked to fight against his son, whom he loved, so parents 
are made s rrowf'ul w r hen they find it necessary to punish their children, 
and so God feels when he has to punish us for sin. 

A good lesson may be drawn from the results of Absalom's wicked 
course toward his father. 

LESSON CXI. 

2 Sam. 19: 9-43; 20: 1-22. We should, like David, be grateful 
for any kindness shown us, and try to repay it in some way. Like him, 
we should also forgive any injury done us. 

LESSON CXII. 
2 Sam. 21 ; 24 ; 1 Chron. 21 ; 1 Kings 1 : 1 Kings 2 : 1-11 ; 1 Chron. 
22 ; 28 : 29. By numbering the people, David showed a lack of 
faith in God. This displeased God, and so w r e displease him when we 
do not trust him and believe his promises. 

David knew that God is more kind and merciful than man. From 
this can be taught a good lesson in regard to the love of God. Review the 
life of David. 

LESSON CX1II. 

1 Kings 3:5-28; 2 Chron. 1 : 7-12. All children and youth can 
learn a good lesson from Solomon's humility, from His willingne-s to 
listen to the advice of his father, and from his answer when the Lord 
said, ' ' What shall I give thee '? " 

LESSON CX1Y. 
1 Kings 5 ; 6 ; 2 Chron. 2. Hiram was very obliging and gener- 
ous, — a good example for children. Solomon took great pains in the 
building of God's house, so we should do when performing any work for 
the Lord. 



30 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

LESSOX CXY. 

1 Kings 7 ; 8 : 2 Ckroii. 3-6 : 7 : 1-1 1. It may be well to give the 
c hildren a more complete description of the temple and its furniture. 

As Solomon asked God's blessing upon his work, so we should ask 
God's blessing upon our work. 

LESSON CXYI. 

1 Kings 9 : 1-10 : 10 : 2 Cbron. 7 : i 2-22 : 9. Solomon's offerings 
and prayers, though pleasing to God, were not all that was required. 
The Lord said that he must do right if he would be accepted. As it 
was with Solomon, so it is with us. 

LESSOX CXTIL 

1 Kings 11. Xo doubt Solomon's association with wicked people 
was one great cause of his sin. A good lesson can be drawn from this 
for the children. 

It may be well to have the children learn some of the verses quoted 
in this lesson. Review the life of Solomon. 

LESSON CXVIII. 

1 Kings 12 : 13 : 2 Chron. 10-12. God's people separated because 
they could not agree and live peaceably together. This spirit of discord 
led to greater troubles and sins, and so it will do now. 
LESSOX CXIX. 

1 Kings 17: Luke 4: 25, 26. God is able to care for his children. 

He can do this without our help : but as it is for our good to assist one 

another, he asks us to do so. The poor widow gave to Elijah, and God 

repaid her by supplying her wants and by raising her son from the dead. 

LESSOX CXX. 

1 Kings 17 : 1 : 18 : 1-40 : James 5 : 17, 18. Like Ahab. we often 
blame others for the result of our oavii wicked actions. 

Additional facts may be given in regard to the heathen methods of 
worship, showing what cruelties were often practiced. 

LESSOX CXXI. 
1 Kings 18 : 41-46 : 19 : 1-19. This lesson teaches that we should 
not become discouraged in right-doing. 

LESSOX CXXIL 
1 Kings 19: 19-21; 2 Kings 1; 2: 1-12. Like Elisha, we should 
be willing to do whatever the Loid may require of us, and our greatest 
desire should be to have a double portion of God's Spirit. Review the 
life of Elijah. 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 31 



LESSON CXXIII. 

2 Kings 2 : 13-25. For practical suggestions, see last part of the 

lesson. 

LESSON CXXIV. 

2 Kings 3:1: 1-7 : : 1-7. Elisha was always willing to give his 
sympathy and help to those in trouble ; we should do the same. 

LESSON CXXV. 

2 Kings 4: 8-14. Notice the kindness and hospitality shown to 
Elisha as a stranger, and call attention to the special care given him as 
soon as he was known to be a servant of God. 

LESSON CXXVI. 
2 Kings 5. Additional facts may be given in regard to leprosy 
and lepers. See cyclopaedia. 

Like Naaman's little maid, we should do good to our enemies. 
Draw some practical lessons from the course pursued by Elisha's serv- 
ant. 

LESSON CXXVI1. 

2 Kings 6 : 8-33 ; 7 ; 8 ; 13 : 1-21. As God sent angels to protect 
Elisha, so he sends them to help us when we are doing right in his sight. 

Elisha returned good for evil, aud sent the soldiers away unharmed. 
Eeview the life of Elisha. 

LESSON CXXVIII. 

Jonah 1 : 1-16. God is displeased when we try to shirk unpleasant 
duties. 

LESSON CXXIX. 

Jonah 1 : 17 ; 2-4. Jonah had to be punished before he would obey, 

so it is with children many times ; but such a course is not pleasing in 

God's sight. 

LESSON CXXX. 

2 Kings 18 : 1-8 ; 20 : 1-13 ; 2 Chron. 32 : 24-31 ; Isa. 38 ; 39 : 1, 2. 
See last part of lesson for practical points. We also learn that it is 
not best to make too great a display of what we may have. 

LESSON CXXXI. 

2 Kings 20:14-21; Isa. 39: 3-8; 2 Kings 19:20-37. Describe 
sackcloth and the ancient custom of mourning. 

When people cause us trouble and speak against us, we should do as 
Hezekiah did, — go to the Lord for help and guidance. 



32 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

LESSON C XXXII. 

Jer. 38 : 3-13 : 2 Kings 24 : 1-16 : 2 Chron. 36 : 9 , 10. This les- 
son teaches us that we should listen to God's servants and take heed to 
what they say, for they are speaking God's word to us. "We should be 
careful also not to drive God away from us by our sins, as did the 
children of Israel. Review lessons 128-132. 

LESSON CXXXUI. 

Dan. 1. Children should be as careful to obey God in their eating 
and drinking as were Daniel and his friends. God will not pass such 
obedience by unnoticed now. any more than he did in Daniel's time. 

LESSON CXXXIT. 

Dan. 2 : 1-30. God never fails to hear our prayers when we are 
earnestly trying to do right in his sight. 

Daniel would not take to himself honor that belonged to God, so 
children should not take to themselves the praise and credit that belong 

to another. 

LESSOX CXXXY. 

Dan. 2 : 31-49. Show the class a picture of this image. Let them 
see that Xebuchadnezzar's dream covered the time in which we live, and 
will not be completely fulfilled until the end of all earthly things. Show 
the children what part of the image represents our time. 

LESSOX CXXXYI. 
Dan. 3 : 1-18. Wherever we are, we should obey God, although we 
may be alone in so doing, and although by such action we may have to 
displease our friends and those older than ourselves. It is right to 
please those around us when by so doing we do not displease God; 
otherwise it is sin. 

LESSOX CXXXYII. 

Dan. 3 : 19-30. It is best to obey God. even though we may have 
to suffer for it here. It is better to suffer for doing right than to suffer 
for doing wrong : the first brings God's blessing and a reward by and by, 
but the last has no comfort mixed with it. 

LESSOX CXXXYIII. 
Dan. 4. Xo matter who we are. we need God's help. Were it not 
for his care, all of us might become like the king when he was driven 
from among men. We should not. like him, continue to do evil until 
some great trouble is sent upon us, but we should gladly do right because 
of God's great goodness to us. Review lessons 133-138. 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 33 

LESSON CXXXIX. 
Dan. 5. As God was displeased with the king because he did not 
take warning from the life and experience of Nebuchadnezzar, so God 
is displeased with us if we do not profit by what he has written for us in 
his word. 

LESSON CXL. 
Isa. 45 : 1-5. Many additional facts of interest may be given in 
connection with this lesson, if time will permit, See ancient history. 

LESSON CXLI. 

Dan. 6. People who please God are those who can be trusted every 
time. Even the wicked know this, as shown by the treatment Daniel 
received while in Babylon. 

We notice that it is only wicked people who are jealous of others. 

A good lesson may be drawn from Daniel's constancy and regularity 
in praying to God. It will also be well to notice that Daniel did not try 
to conceal the fact that he was trying to obey the Lord. 

LESSON CXLII. 
Dan. 9 : 1-23. It does not take long for the Lord to hear our 
prayers, as shown by the answer which Daniel received. Call attention 
to Daniel's study of the prophecies of Jeremiah. 

LESSON CXLIII. 

Isa. 44 : 28 ; Ezra 1 ; 2 : 64-70 ; 3. This lesson shows that sin is not 
only displeasing to God, but it brings sorrow to ourselves. The Jews 
would have been saved much trouble had they remained faithful to God 
when first at Jerusalem. 

LESSON CXLIV. 

Ezra 4-7 ; Neh. 1 ; 2 ; 4 ; 6. Wicked people tried to hinder the 
work of rebuilding Jerusalem, — 1. By ridiculing tke Jews ; 2. By entic- 
ing them to leave their work; 3. By threatening them. In the same 
ways wicked people still try to make us do what is not right. Review 
lessons 139-144. 

LESSON CXLY. 

Esther 1-3. When people do not treat us as we would like to 
have them, we should not become angry and try to do them harm. The 
better way is to do them some kindness, and then, perhaps, they will be 
more friendly. 



34 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

LESSON CXLVI. 

Esther 4 : 5 : 6 : 1-9. Like Esther, we should be willing to suffer, 
if by so doing we can help others. 

It is not best to think too highly of ourselves. Such ideas often 
lead us to make great mistakes. 

LESSON CXLVII. 

Esther 6 : 10-14 ; 7-9. People who try to get others into trouble 
often bring trouble upon themselves. 

Xotice again that although a kind act may not be appreciated at the 
time, it will sometime receive its reward. 

LESSON C XL Till. 

Job 1. Call attention to Satan's eagerness to cause sorrow and 
trouble. 

Xotice Job's good qualities : 1. He was a man who served the Lord : 
2. He taught his children to obey: 3. He would not complain, no 
matter how great his trouble might be. 

LESSOX CXLIX. 

Job 2-4 : 19 : 19-29 ; 38 ; 42 : 13-17. We see by this lesson that 
Satan delights in our sorrow and pain, and is ever trying to lead us into 
sin. God is not so; although he sometimes allows trouble to come 
to try us, still he is sorry for us. and helps us to bear it. and will always 
care for us if we do right. Review lessons 145-149. 

Note.— As a supplementary work, the teacher should now review all. the 
subjects passed over. This review should he general, hut at the same time con- 
nected and adapted to the age of the pupils. If the children are able to read 
writing, questions may be placed on the blackboard for them to study. If this 
cannot be done, the questions maybe asked and answered at the same recitation, 
the teacher answering all questions that the pupils cannot answer, thus refreshing 
their memory on forgotten points. ; p~p 



^WS32^ 



- = */■.-.: 



mm 



faffSafcaSSf. 



iW,m 



k -m^ 



>mm 



Wmmti 



:zr*ej 



ir&r/ ■-{*40>&x 



m 







LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
I 



II Mi ! Mill! III! II 
014 244 988 2 



